CNL-15-170, Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 18: Line 18:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:Tennessee Valley Authority, 1101 Market Street, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37402 CNL-15-170 August 28, 2015 10 CFR 50.90 U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission ATTN: Document Control Desk Washington, D.C. 20555-0001 Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Facility Operating License No. NFP-90 NRC Docket No. 50-390
{{#Wiki_filter:Tennessee Valley Authority, 1101 Market Street, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37402 CNL-15-170 August 28, 2015 10 CFR 50.90 U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission ATTN: Document Control Desk Washington, D.C. 20555-0001 Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Facility Operating License No. NFP-90 NRC Docket No. 50-390  


==Subject:==
==Subject:==
Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request
Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request  


==References:==
==References:==
Line 28: Line 28:
: 3. Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual-Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]
: 3. Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual-Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]
: 4. Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015 [ML15197A357]
: 4. Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015 [ML15197A357]
By letter dated June 17, 2015, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By letter dated July 9, 2015, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By letter dated July 14, 2015 (Reference 4),
By {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=letter dated June 17, 2015}}, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By {{letter dated|date=July 9, 2015|text=letter dated July 9, 2015}}, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By {{letter dated|date=July 14, 2015|text=letter dated July 14, 2015}} (Reference 4),
TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.  


U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 2 August 28, 2015 Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 2 August 28, 2015 Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.
Line 37: Line 37:
There are no new regulatory commitments associated with this letter. Please direct any questions concerning this matter to Gordon Arent at (423) 365-2004.
There are no new regulatory commitments associated with this letter. Please direct any questions concerning this matter to Gordon Arent at (423) 365-2004.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on the 28th day of August 2015.
I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on the 28th day of August 2015.
Respectfully, Digitally signed by J. W. Shea J. W. Shea DN: cn=J. W. Shea, o=Tennessee Valley Authority, ou=Nuclear Licensing, email=jwshea@tva.gov, c=US Date: 2015.08.28 22:26:28 -04'00' J. W. Shea Vice President, Nuclear Licensing Enclosure cc: See Page 3
Respectfully, J. W. Shea Vice President, Nuclear Licensing Enclosure cc: See Page 3 J. W. Shea Digitally signed by J. W. Shea DN: cn=J. W. Shea, o=Tennessee Valley Authority, ou=Nuclear Licensing, email=jwshea@tva.gov, c=US Date: 2015.08.28 22:26:28 -04'00'


U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 3 August 28, 2015
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 3 August 28, 2015  


==Enclosure:==
==Enclosure:==
Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request cc (Enclosure):
Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request cc (Enclosure):
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Region II NRC Senior Resident Inspector - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 NRC Project Manager - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Director - Division of Radiological Health - Tennessee State Department of Environment and Conservation
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Region II NRC Senior Resident Inspector - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 NRC Project Manager - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Director - Division of Radiological Health - Tennessee State Department of Environment and Conservation  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 1 of 64


===Background===
===Background===
By letter dated June 17, 2015, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By letter dated July 9, 2015, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By letter dated July 14, 2015 (Reference 4),
By {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=letter dated June 17, 2015}}, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By {{letter dated|date=July 9, 2015|text=letter dated July 9, 2015}}, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By {{letter dated|date=July 14, 2015|text=letter dated July 14, 2015}} (Reference 4),
TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.
Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.
During the audit, the NRC and TVA discussed numerous questions related to the LAR.
During the audit, the NRC and TVA discussed numerous questions related to the LAR.
This enclosure provides the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions. As a result of the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions, changes are required to TS 3.7.16, TS 3.7.17, and the associated Bases. To address the NRC concern regarding the availability of Reactor Coolant System loops within the initial seven hours after reactor shut down, a change to additional TSs may be required. In addition, this enclosure includes wording additions for Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapters 6, 9 and 10 to clarify ice bed sublimation assumptions and water sources available to the AFW System. The proposed changes to the TS will be submitted in a license amendment request by September 11, 2015. The FSAR changes will be incorporated in WBN Unit 2 FSAR Amendment 114.
This enclosure provides the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions. As a result of the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions, changes are required to TS 3.7.16, TS 3.7.17, and the associated Bases. To address the NRC concern regarding the availability of Reactor Coolant System loops within the initial seven hours after reactor shut down, a change to additional TSs may be required. In addition, this enclosure includes wording additions for Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapters 6, 9 and 10 to clarify ice bed sublimation assumptions and water sources available to the AFW System. The proposed changes to the TS will be submitted in a license amendment request by September 11, 2015. The FSAR changes will be incorporated in WBN Unit 2 FSAR Amendment 114.  
Page 1 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request References
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 2 of 64
: 1. Letter from TVA to NRC, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 - Application to Revise Technical Specifications for Component Cooling Water and Essential Raw Cooling Water to Support Dual Unit Operation (TS-WBN-15-13), dated June 17, 2015
References
: 1.
Letter from TVA to NRC, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 - Application to Revise Technical Specifications for Component Cooling Water and Essential Raw Cooling Water to Support Dual Unit Operation (TS-WBN-15-13), dated June 17, 2015
[ML15170A474]
[ML15170A474]
: 2. Email from NRC to TVA, Preliminary Draft RAIs Associated with Proposed WBN 1 ERCW and CCS Technical Specifications LAR, dated July 2, 2015
: 2.
: 3. Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]
Email from NRC to TVA, Preliminary Draft RAIs Associated with Proposed WBN 1 ERCW and CCS Technical Specifications LAR, dated July 2, 2015
: 4. Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015
: 3.
[ML15197A357]
Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]
Page 2 of 64
: 4.
Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015
[ML15197A357]  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                         Date Posted BOP - 1                                               With one Component Cooling Water System (CCS) or Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System train inoperable, a loss of redundancy has occurred. However, the TS 3.0.4 does not allow Mode changes when            capability to mitigate an accident in one unit and cooldown the other unit (or maintain the applicable LCOs for that Mode are not met. The        other unit in a cooldown condition) is maintained by the remaining operable CCS and problem with possible Mode change from 4 to 3 after  ERCW trains. Therefore, a Mode change from 5 to 4 or from 4 to 3 is not anticipated.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 3 of 64
shutdown is that equipment may have been taken out of service that is required to meet the LCOs of  During a normal shutdown, decay heat removal is via the reactor coolant system (RCS)
Item No.
TS that are required for Mode 3. A similar statement  loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to Residual Heat Removal can be made for a Mode change from 5 to 4. The        (RHR) System entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). Therefore, as LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 proposed TS make no provision for suspending or      become Applicable (entry into Mode 4), the RCS loops are still operable. At this point, stopping the process of making more equipment        LCO 3.7.16 requires an additional CCS Train B pump powered from and aligned to the inoperable that otherwise would be required to        CCS Train B header, and LCO 3.7.17 requires one additional ERCW pump be capable of
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
: 1. support Mode change, if the proposed LCO is not      being powered from and aligned to each ERCW train. However, the requirement of met. Explain why the proposed TSs do not include      LCO 3.4.6, RCS-Loops - MODE 4, is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.
: 1.
an Action to stop making more equipment inoperable that would be required for the Mode change when      If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in the proposed TS LCOs are not met, or make            Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional provisions to correct the issues.                    methods available to remove decay heat (i.e., RCS loops). However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent loss of coolant Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  accident (LOCA) in the other unit.
BOP - 1 TS 3.0.4 does not allow Mode changes when applicable LCOs for that Mode are not met. The problem with possible Mode change from 4 to 3 after shutdown is that equipment may have been taken out of service that is required to meet the LCOs of TS that are required for Mode 3. A similar statement can be made for a Mode change from 5 to 4. The proposed TS make no provision for suspending or stopping the process of making more equipment inoperable that otherwise would be required to support Mode change, if the proposed LCO is not met. Explain why the proposed TSs do not include an Action to stop making more equipment inoperable that would be required for the Mode change when the proposed TS LCOs are not met, or make provisions to correct the issues.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 With one Component Cooling Water System (CCS) or Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System train inoperable, a loss of redundancy has occurred. However, the capability to mitigate an accident in one unit and cooldown the other unit (or maintain the other unit in a cooldown condition) is maintained by the remaining operable CCS and ERCW trains. Therefore, a Mode change from 5 to 4 or from 4 to 3 is not anticipated.
During a normal shutdown, decay heat removal is via the reactor coolant system (RCS) loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to Residual Heat Removal (RHR) System entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). Therefore, as LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become Applicable (entry into Mode 4), the RCS loops are still operable. At this point, LCO 3.7.16 requires an additional CCS Train B pump powered from and aligned to the CCS Train B header, and LCO 3.7.17 requires one additional ERCW pump be capable of being powered from and aligned to each ERCW train. However, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6, RCS-Loops - MODE 4, is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.
If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional methods available to remove decay heat (i.e., RCS loops). However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent loss of coolant accident (LOCA) in the other unit.
Therefore, it is unnecessary for TS to provide provisions for suspending or stopping the process of making more equipment inoperable.
Therefore, it is unnecessary for TS to provide provisions for suspending or stopping the process of making more equipment inoperable.
BOP - 2                                               The Actions of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are predicated on the preference to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 have provision to enter LCO      the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS loops operable in addition to the remaining operable 3.4.6 with one train inoperable because ERCW and      RHR loop. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met CCS are support systems for decay heat                with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary
: 2.
: 2. removal. Otherwise TS 3.0.6 could allow LCO 3.4.6      to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and to not be entered. Standard TS are similarly worded. LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
BOP - 2 TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 have provision to enter LCO 3.4.6 with one train inoperable because ERCW and CCS are support systems for decay heat removal. Otherwise TS 3.0.6 could allow LCO 3.4.6 to not be entered. Standard TS are similarly worded.
It appears that proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 actions for one train inoperable should similarly have If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be provisions for entering TS 3.4.6. TS 3.4.6 would lead  met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be to different action than what TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17  placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions Page 3 of 64
It appears that proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 actions for one train inoperable should similarly have provisions for entering TS 3.4.6. TS 3.4.6 would lead to different action than what TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 The Actions of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are predicated on the preference to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS loops operable in addition to the remaining operable RHR loop. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted currently propose for 1 loop inoperable. Explain why require the unit to be placed in MODE 5; Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be the proposed TS differ from 3.7.7 and 3.7.8 in this  placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 4 of 64
respect, or correct the issue.
Item No.
These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and Date Posted: 07/31/15                                LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted currently propose for 1 loop inoperable. Explain why the proposed TS differ from 3.7.7 and 3.7.8 in this respect, or correct the issue.
BOP - 3                                               Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). As TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 have required action to      LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still verify Tavg > 200 F. But the bases for TS 3.4.6 says  being met by the two operable RCS loops.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 require the unit to be placed in MODE 5; Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours.
with one RHR train available, it would be safer to be in Mode 5 because if the remaining train of decay    If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, maintaining the unit in heat was lost, the loss would occur at a lower        Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional temperature. Explain this difference between          methods available to remove decay heat. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 TS 3.4.6 and proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17.          Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Date Posted: 07/31/15                                Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.
3.
: 3.
BOP - 3 TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 have required action to verify Tavg > 200 F. But the bases for TS 3.4.6 says with one RHR train available, it would be safer to be in Mode 5 because if the remaining train of decay heat was lost, the loss would occur at a lower temperature. Explain this difference between TS 3.4.6 and proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). As LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.
If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional methods available to remove decay heat. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in MODE 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours.
If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in MODE 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours.
These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.
These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.
BOP - 4                                               LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 provide requirements in addition to those of LCO 3.7.7 and LCO 3.7.8. However, the additional requirements of LCO 3.7.17 are not required for DG 4.
: 4.
TS 3.7.8 for ERCW has a provision for entering TS    operability. There is sufficient flow to the diesel generators (DGs) from ERCW without a 3.8.1 for emergency diesel generators made            third ERCW pump in each train to support DG Operability. Although the requirements of Page 4 of 64
BOP - 4 TS 3.7.8 for ERCW has a provision for entering TS 3.8.1 for emergency diesel generators made LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 provide requirements in addition to those of LCO 3.7.7 and LCO 3.7.8. However, the additional requirements of LCO 3.7.17 are not required for DG operability. There is sufficient flow to the diesel generators (DGs) from ERCW without a third ERCW pump in each train to support DG Operability. Although the requirements of  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted inoperable by ERCW when one ERCW loop is               LCO 3.7.17 may not be met (i.e., a third pump capable of being aligned to each ERCW inoperable. Discuss why TS 3.7.17 does not have the    Train) the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are still met. If the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are same provision.                                        not met, the Actions of LCO 3.7.8 include the requirement to enter the Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.1 for DGs made inoperable by ERCW.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 5 of 64
Date Posted: 07/31/15 BOP - 5                                                With two ERCW trains inoperable for LCO 3.7.17, there may be insufficient ERCW flow available to place the non-accident unit in Mode 5 during the mitigation of a LOCA on the TS 3.7.17 has a Note for LCO 3.0.3 to suspend Mode      other unit. Otherwise, the preference is to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple change. For a scenario of two ERCW trains              methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS inoperable per TS 3.7.17, but at least one ERCW        loops operable.
Item No.
5.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted inoperable by ERCW when one ERCW loop is inoperable. Discuss why TS 3.7.17 does not have the same provision.
train operable per TS 3.7.8, provide discussion and justification why it is safer to stay in Mode 4 and not continue cooldown to Mode 5 for this TS condition.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 LCO 3.7.17 may not be met (i.e., a third pump capable of being aligned to each ERCW Train) the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are still met. If the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are not met, the Actions of LCO 3.7.8 include the requirement to enter the Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.1 for DGs made inoperable by ERCW.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 BOP - 6                                                Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). As In TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 for one train inoperable,    LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still the TS Actions make a distinction between a normal      being met by the two operable RCS loops.
: 5.
shutdown and a TS required shutdown. Explain the distinction in shutdown requirements between a          If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, Condition B requires normal shutdown and a TS required shutdown for TS      that the unit be maintained in Mode 4 (with decay heat removal from the RCS loops).
BOP - 5 TS 3.7.17 has a Note for LCO 3.0.3 to suspend Mode change. For a scenario of two ERCW trains inoperable per TS 3.7.17, but at least one ERCW train operable per TS 3.7.8, provide discussion and justification why it is safer to stay in Mode 4 and not continue cooldown to Mode 5 for this TS condition.
3.7.16 and 3.7.17                                      Maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with additional methods of decay heat removal available minimizes the likelihood of a situation where the decay heat and residual heat of the unit Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  exceeds the capability of the available RHR loop resulting in the possibility of an 6.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 With two ERCW trains inoperable for LCO 3.7.17, there may be insufficient ERCW flow available to place the non-accident unit in Mode 5 during the mitigation of a LOCA on the other unit. Otherwise, the preference is to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS loops operable.
unintentional Mode change. If the Required Actions and Completion Times of Condition B are not met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 37 hours. With one CCS train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
: 6.
If TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit.
BOP - 6 In TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 for one train inoperable, the TS Actions make a distinction between a normal shutdown and a TS required shutdown. Explain the distinction in shutdown requirements between a normal shutdown and a TS required shutdown for TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 Date Posted: 07/31/15 Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350&#xba;F). As LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.
Page 5 of 64
If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, Condition B requires that the unit be maintained in Mode 4 (with decay heat removal from the RCS loops).
Maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with additional methods of decay heat removal available minimizes the likelihood of a situation where the decay heat and residual heat of the unit exceeds the capability of the available RHR loop resulting in the possibility of an unintentional Mode change. If the Required Actions and Completion Times of Condition B are not met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 37 hours. With one CCS train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours.
If TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                           Date Posted BOP - 7                                               See responses to BOP-10 and BOP-11.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 6 of 64
TVA has made a general statement that there is adequate clean water on site to support a 48 hour cooldown with aux feedwater since:
Item No.
x   Unit 1 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 requires 200,000 gallons) x   Unit 2 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 (Rev J) requires 200,000 gallons) x   Demin tank @ 500,000 gallons x   Aux feedwater storage tank @ 500,000 gallons (added for FLEX mitigating strategies)
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
TVAs response in the supplement included appeared to credit cross-tie between the Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs as well as reliance on water stored in the FLEX
: 7.
: 7. tank. It is not clear how these clean water sources are currently identified and credited within the licensing basis to support normal hot standby cooling functions, as this does not appear to be described in the FSAR, and other licensing basis related references, as noted below:
BOP - 7 TVA has made a general statement that there is adequate clean water on site to support a 48 hour cooldown with aux feedwater since:
x Unit 1 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 requires 200,000 gallons) x Unit 2 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 (Rev J) requires 200,000 gallons) x Demin tank @ 500,000 gallons x
Aux feedwater storage tank @ 500,000 gallons (added for FLEX mitigating strategies)
TVAs response in the supplement included appeared to credit cross-tie between the Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs as well as reliance on water stored in the FLEX tank. It is not clear how these clean water sources are currently identified and credited within the licensing basis to support normal hot standby cooling functions, as this does not appear to be described in the FSAR, and other licensing basis related references, as noted below:
From Watts Bar FSAR:
From Watts Bar FSAR:
9.2.6.3 The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
9.2.6.3 The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
10.4.9.2 Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except in emergencies when the condensate supply is unavailable.
10.4.9.2 Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except in emergencies when the condensate supply is unavailable.
Page 6 of 64
See responses to BOP-10 and BOP-11.


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted From SE in NUREG 0847, Supp 23 (June 2011):
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 7 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted From SE in NUREG 0847, Supp 23 (June 2011):
TVA's proposed clarification to the FSAR is acceptable to the NRC staff. Because the CSTs are credited only for the SBO event under 10 CFR 50.63, and TVA does not plan to share CSTs between the units during plant operation, the staff concludes that TVA satisfies GDC 5 regarding the CSTs. Confirmation by the staff of TVA's change to FSAR Section 10.4.9 to reflect TVA's intention to operate with each CST isolated from the other is Open Item 62 (Appendix HH).
TVA's proposed clarification to the FSAR is acceptable to the NRC staff. Because the CSTs are credited only for the SBO event under 10 CFR 50.63, and TVA does not plan to share CSTs between the units during plant operation, the staff concludes that TVA satisfies GDC 5 regarding the CSTs. Confirmation by the staff of TVA's change to FSAR Section 10.4.9 to reflect TVA's intention to operate with each CST isolated from the other is Open Item 62 (Appendix HH).
Date Posted: 07/31/15 BOP - 8                                               TVA notes the AFW inlet temperatures are affected by the component cooling heat exchangers and the containment spray heat exchangers as well as miscellaneous loads.
Date Posted: 07/31/15
Because the AFW takeoff is at the end of the ERCW    The component cooling heat exchanger analysis demonstrates that ERCW discharge system, after heat removal from the safety related    temperature may exceed 120&#xba;F but these are cases where AFW is not required. However, heat exchangers, confirm ERCW to AFW will still be    an examination of the containment spray heat exchanger discharge layout with respect to at the assumed maximum allowable temperature to      AFW suction indicates cases where AFW could exceed 120&#xba;F when AFW is required.
: 8.
satisfy Chapter 15 requirements (80-120&deg;F).
BOP - 8 Because the AFW takeoff is at the end of the ERCW system, after heat removal from the safety related heat exchangers, confirm ERCW to AFW will still be at the assumed maximum allowable temperature to satisfy Chapter 15 requirements (80-120&deg;F).
Date Posted: 07/31/15 TVA notes the AFW inlet temperatures are affected by the component cooling heat exchangers and the containment spray heat exchangers as well as miscellaneous loads.
The component cooling heat exchanger analysis demonstrates that ERCW discharge temperature may exceed 120&#xba;F but these are cases where AFW is not required. However, an examination of the containment spray heat exchanger discharge layout with respect to AFW suction indicates cases where AFW could exceed 120&#xba;F when AFW is required.
The following arrangements are noted:
The following arrangements are noted:
Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  x Motor driven AFW 1A-A/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but 8.
x Motor driven AFW 1A-A/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.
downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.
x Motor driven AFW 1B-B/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.
x Motor driven AFW 1B-B/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.
x Motor driven AFW 2A-A/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.
x Motor driven AFW 2A-A/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.
x Motor driven AFW 2B-B/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.
x Motor driven AFW 2B-B/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.
If a LOCA was postulated in unit 1:
If a LOCA was postulated in unit 1:  
Page 7 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted x   MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 120&#xba;F and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 120&#xba;F.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 8 of 64
x   MDAFW 1B-B would be bounded by 130&#xba;F and MDAFW 2B-B would be bounded by 130&#xba;F.
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted x
MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 120&#xba;F and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 120&#xba;F.
x MDAFW 1B-B would be bounded by 130&#xba;F and MDAFW 2B-B would be bounded by 130&#xba;F.
If a LOCA was postulated in unit 2:
If a LOCA was postulated in unit 2:
x MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 130&#xba;F and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 130&#xba;F.
x MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 130&#xba;F and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 130&#xba;F.
Line 131: Line 150:
For the case where the large break LOCA was in the opposite unit (U1/MDAFW 2B-B and U2/MDAFW 1A-A), the AFW would be used to shutdown the non-LOCA unit and may be at a higher ERCW discharge temperature. This would result in slightly warmer water for unit shutdown and would have no deleterious effect on the non-LOCA unit.
For the case where the large break LOCA was in the opposite unit (U1/MDAFW 2B-B and U2/MDAFW 1A-A), the AFW would be used to shutdown the non-LOCA unit and may be at a higher ERCW discharge temperature. This would result in slightly warmer water for unit shutdown and would have no deleterious effect on the non-LOCA unit.
SBLOCA The small break LOCA is described in FSAR Section 15.3. Unlike the large break LOCA, the small LOCA credits the continued use of AFW for cooling the LOCA unit. Break sizes for small LOCAs examined in the FSAR range from 2 inches to over 8 inches in diameter.
SBLOCA The small break LOCA is described in FSAR Section 15.3. Unlike the large break LOCA, the small LOCA credits the continued use of AFW for cooling the LOCA unit. Break sizes for small LOCAs examined in the FSAR range from 2 inches to over 8 inches in diameter.
It can be observed from FSAR Table 15.3-2 and supporting calculations that for all but the smallest break size, the transient has peaked prior to switchover to the containment sump recirculation and therefore would not be impacted. The smallest break peaks later in the Page 8 of 64
It can be observed from FSAR Table 15.3-2 and supporting calculations that for all but the smallest break size, the transient has peaked prior to switchover to the containment sump recirculation and therefore would not be impacted. The smallest break peaks later in the  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item               NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                      Date Posted transient but at a much lower peak clad temperature. Because the only impact of the higher AFW temperature is a slightly increased enthalpy for the liquid entering the generator and because the majority of the energy is removed by vaporization (inlet enthalpy of 81 Btu/lb versus 91 Btu/lb for AFW compared to steam at approximately 1183 Btu/lb), a less than 1% change in enthalpy would be insignificant to the smallest LOCA.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 9 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted transient but at a much lower peak clad temperature. Because the only impact of the higher AFW temperature is a slightly increased enthalpy for the liquid entering the generator and because the majority of the energy is removed by vaporization (inlet enthalpy of 81 Btu/lb versus 91 Btu/lb for AFW compared to steam at approximately 1183 Btu/lb), a less than 1% change in enthalpy would be insignificant to the smallest LOCA.
The smallest LOCA peaks at 1009&#xba;F for Unit 2 with considerable margin to the limiting peak clad temperature of 2200&#xba;F and margin to the limiting small break LOCA peak clad temperature of 1183.9&#xba;F.
The smallest LOCA peaks at 1009&#xba;F for Unit 2 with considerable margin to the limiting peak clad temperature of 2200&#xba;F and margin to the limiting small break LOCA peak clad temperature of 1183.9&#xba;F.
NPSH A NPSH analysis indicates AFW will perform acceptably at 130&#xba;F with NPSH margin.
NPSH A NPSH analysis indicates AFW will perform acceptably at 130&#xba;F with NPSH margin.
Condition Report (CR) 1072659 has been initiated to document this issue. A copy of the CR has been uploaded to the Sharepoint Site. The AFW system description, FSAR, and associated calculations will be revised to note cases where the AFW maximum temperature of 120&#xba;F may be exceeded.
Condition Report (CR) 1072659 has been initiated to document this issue. A copy of the CR has been uploaded to the Sharepoint Site. The AFW system description, FSAR, and associated calculations will be revised to note cases where the AFW maximum temperature of 120&#xba;F may be exceeded.
BOP - 9                                           When the opposite unit has been shutdown for a period of time, the additional CCS and ERCW pump requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are not required to ensure Describe the ERCW and CCS analysis as it pertains  adequate decay heat removal by the RHR System. However, there may be some to a LOCA in one unit while in MODE 4 and a        scenarios when the opposite unit has been shutdown for greater than 48 hours that the controlled shutdown of the other Unit as it enters heat removal capacity of the RHR System is insufficient without the CCS and ERCW MODE 4 or 5.                                      System requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 being applicable.
: 9.
Date Posted: 07/31/15                              Therefore, TVA will remove Applicability Note b, so that the Applicability of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 in Modes 4 and 5 is dependent on whether the associated unit has been shutdown for less than 48 hours.
BOP - 9 Describe the ERCW and CCS analysis as it pertains to a LOCA in one unit while in MODE 4 and a controlled shutdown of the other Unit as it enters MODE 4 or 5.
9.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 When the opposite unit has been shutdown for a period of time, the additional CCS and ERCW pump requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are not required to ensure adequate decay heat removal by the RHR System. However, there may be some scenarios when the opposite unit has been shutdown for greater than 48 hours that the heat removal capacity of the RHR System is insufficient without the CCS and ERCW System requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 being applicable.
This response supersedes the response provided to Acceptance Review Question #2 provided in TVA letter dated July 14, 2015.
Therefore, TVA will remove Applicability Note b, so that the Applicability of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 in Modes 4 and 5 is dependent on whether the associated unit has been shutdown for less than 48 hours.
This response supersedes the response provided to Acceptance Review Question #2 provided in TVA {{letter dated|date=July 14, 2015|text=letter dated July 14, 2015}}.
The following events are required to be supported by the CCS and ERCW configurations proposed in TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
The following events are required to be supported by the CCS and ERCW configurations proposed in TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
The CCS shall be designed to remove heat from potentially or normally radioactive heat loads during any mode of normal operation, and incidents of moderate frequency. In addition, the CCS shall be designed to remove heat from the RHR HXs and various pump Page 9 of 64
The CCS shall be designed to remove heat from potentially or normally radioactive heat loads during any mode of normal operation, and incidents of moderate frequency. In addition, the CCS shall be designed to remove heat from the RHR HXs and various pump  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted seal and/or lube oil coolers during infrequent incidents, and limiting faults. The CCS is required to mitigate the consequences of Design Basis Events (DBEs). The required DBEs and associated safety functions for the CCS are in WB-DC-40-64.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 10 of 64
EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT CCS Fire Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of The Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal At Power Page 10 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted seal and/or lube oil coolers during infrequent incidents, and limiting faults. The CCS is required to mitigate the consequences of Design Basis Events (DBEs). The required DBEs and associated safety functions for the CCS are in WB-DC-40-64.
EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT CCS Fire Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of The Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal At Power  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted Single RCCA Withdrawal At Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 11 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Single RCCA Withdrawal At Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)
Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations The ERCW System is required to mitigate the consequences of plant Design Basis Events described in WB-DC-40-64. It performs a Primary Safety Function by providing cooling and makeup for essential safety-related plant equipment and components in response to adverse plant operating conditions which impose safety-related performance requirements on the systems being served.
Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations The ERCW System is required to mitigate the consequences of plant Design Basis Events described in WB-DC-40-64. It performs a Primary Safety Function by providing cooling and makeup for essential safety-related plant equipment and components in response to adverse plant operating conditions which impose safety-related performance requirements on the systems being served.
EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT ERCW Fire Design Basis Flood Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break Page 11 of 64
EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT ERCW Fire Design Basis Flood Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of the Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal at Power Single RCCA Withdrawal at Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 12 of 64
Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations BOP - 10                                             a. ERCW is the safety-related source of water to AFW. Whenever the steam generators are relied on for heat removal, the switchover from the CST to ERCW is required to be Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -        operable.
Item No.
letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or    b. TVA considers the current Applicability of LCO 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Item 6.f, Auxiliary Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the        Feedwater Pumps Train A and B Suction Transfer on Suction Pressure - Low,
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of the Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal at Power Single RCCA Withdrawal at Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)
: 10. steam generators for at least 48 hours as one of the    appropriate as written.
Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations
options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to address the use of available and approved clean        TVA will develop a TRM to control this function while a change is being evaluated for a water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance          generic approach with PWROG. Procedure guidance will be provided in the cooldown with the approved licensing basis.                      procedure (GO-6).
: 10.
From the TVA response:                                  Draft TRM has been posted to SharePoint site.
BOP - 10 Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -
Page 12 of 64
letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the steam generators for at least 48 hours as one of the options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to address the use of available and approved clean water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance with the approved licensing basis.
From the TVA response:
: a. ERCW is the safety-related source of water to AFW. Whenever the steam generators are relied on for heat removal, the switchover from the CST to ERCW is required to be operable.
: b. TVA considers the current Applicability of LCO 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Item 6.f, Auxiliary Feedwater Pumps Train A and B Suction Transfer on Suction Pressure - Low, appropriate as written.
TVA will develop a TRM to control this function while a change is being evaluated for a generic approach with PWROG. Procedure guidance will be provided in the cooldown procedure (GO-6).
Draft TRM has been posted to SharePoint site.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted The safety-related water supply for AFW is ERCW.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 13 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The safety-related water supply for AFW is ERCW.
The AFW suction source automatically switches from the CST to ERCW when a low pressure condition exists in the AFW pump suction piping from the CST.
The AFW suction source automatically switches from the CST to ERCW when a low pressure condition exists in the AFW pump suction piping from the CST.
The switchover to ERCW will occur whenever AFW is in service to assure heat removal through the steam generators if the low pressure condition exists. This assures the safety function of decay heat removal is accomplished.
The switchover to ERCW will occur whenever AFW is in service to assure heat removal through the steam generators if the low pressure condition exists. This assures the safety function of decay heat removal is accomplished.
Line 165: Line 198:
TS 3.7.5, Auxiliary feedwater system, applicable is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.
TS 3.7.5, Auxiliary feedwater system, applicable is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.
TS 3.7.6 Condensate storage tank, applicability is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.
TS 3.7.6 Condensate storage tank, applicability is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.
BTS 3.7.6 states that as the preferred water source to satisfy accident analysis assumptions, the CST must contain sufficient cooling water to remove decay heat for 2 hours following a reactor trip from 100.6% RTP, and then to cool down the RCS to RHR entry conditions, assuming a coincident loss of offsite power and the most adverse single failure. In doing this, it must retain sufficient water to ensure adequate net positive suction head for the AFW pumps during cooldown, as well as account for any losses from the steam driven AFW pump turbine, or before isolating Page 13 of 64
BTS 3.7.6 states that as the preferred water source to satisfy accident analysis assumptions, the CST must contain sufficient cooling water to remove decay heat for 2 hours following a reactor trip from 100.6% RTP, and then to cool down the RCS to RHR entry conditions, assuming a coincident loss of offsite power and the most adverse single failure. In doing this, it must retain sufficient water to ensure adequate net positive suction head for the AFW pumps during cooldown, as well as account for any losses from the steam driven AFW pump turbine, or before isolating  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                      Date Posted AFW to a broken line. The CST level required is equivalent to a usable volume of 200,000 gallons, which is based on holding the unit in MODE 3 for 2 hours, followed by a cooldown to RHR entry conditions at 50 F/hour. This basis is established in Reference 4 and exceeds the volume required by the accident analysis.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 14 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted AFW to a broken line. The CST level required is equivalent to a usable volume of 200,000 gallons, which is based on holding the unit in MODE 3 for 2 hours, followed by a cooldown to RHR entry conditions at 50 F/hour. This basis is established in Reference 4 and exceeds the volume required by the accident analysis.
UFSAR 9.2.6.3, Safety Evaluation, states that the condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water.
UFSAR 9.2.6.3, Safety Evaluation, states that the condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water.
The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b). Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater can be obtained from both tanks. The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b). Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater can be obtained from both tanks. The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
Line 173: Line 208:
: a. Since the Unit 1 CST water is limited in volume to support operations beyond 7 hours and the proposed changes state that AFW operations is now needed for operations out to 72 hours, describe the bases for the CST to ERCW automatic switchover to support Mode 4 operations.
: a. Since the Unit 1 CST water is limited in volume to support operations beyond 7 hours and the proposed changes state that AFW operations is now needed for operations out to 72 hours, describe the bases for the CST to ERCW automatic switchover to support Mode 4 operations.
: b. Based on the response to part a, describe the necessary changes to the UFSAR, TS, and TS Bases.
: b. Based on the response to part a, describe the necessary changes to the UFSAR, TS, and TS Bases.
Date Posted: 08/03/15 Page 14 of 64
Date Posted: 08/03/15  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                         Date Posted BOP - 11                                               a. The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) is sized to provide seven hours of clean water (200,000 gallons). This assumes maintaining operation in Mode 3 for two hours and Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -          then cooling down for five hours at 50 degrees per hour. At seven hours post trip, the letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that            required amount for AFW flow is 175 gpm. An extrapolation of this amount for the question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or          remaining 41 hours would result in the conclusion that approximately 430,500 gallons Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the          of clean water would be required to feed AFW.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 15 of 64
steam generators for at least 48 hours as one of the options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to      This estimate is very conservative in that maintaining a stable level requires much less address the use of available and approved clean          water than cooling down and also in the fact that this level does not account for the water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance            slow decay of AFW flow required over the period. As an example, at the 48 hour point, with the approved licensing basis.                        only approximately 110 gpm is required to satisfy the AFW demand.
Item No.
From the TVA response:                                 b. Normal makeup to the CST is provided from vendor operated equipment. Clean water is produced and added to the Demineralized Water Storage Tank (DWST). The There is adequate clean water to support a unit          capacity of the normal makeup system is sufficient to maintain CST inventory for being maintained on AFW for 48 hours. The capacity        extended continued operation in Mode 3 or 4.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
of each of the two CSTs is 395,000 gallons and the normal maximum volume in the CSTs is                      As an actual example, in 2014, WBN was maintained in Mode 3 for the period from July 11.
: 11.
approximately 385,000 gallons. Review of operational      13 at 1937 to July 15 at 0503. During the first 27 hours, the normal makeup system to data for the past five years shows that the WBN Unit      the CST maintained CST level at the normal level of 325,000 gallons while supplying 1 CST has been maintained at approximately                the required AFW flow in Mode 3. The level did decrease during the final five hours of 330,000 gallons. Because AFW is not the only              Mode 3 operation, but this decrease was due to increased water usage associated with system that uses CST water, a standpipe is provided      feed and bleed on the condensate system to establish secondary parameters to in the tank to assure that a minimum of 200,000          support plant startup.
BOP - 11 Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -
gallons of water is available for the sole use of AFW.
letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the steam generators for at least 48 hours as one of the options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to address the use of available and approved clean water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance with the approved licensing basis.
Thus, the site maintains approximately 130,000            Thus, for a normal extended operation in Mode 4, such as one in which the plant gallons of water in the CST above the TS limit.          cannot continue into Mode 5 due to inability to establish the required CCS and ERCW Normal make-up to the CST comes from the                  alignments to support entry into Mode 5, the normal DWST makeup to the CST will be Demineralized Water Storage (DWST) Tank and the          used to replenish the CST inventory with clean water.
From the TVA response:
Make-up Water Treatment Plant (MWTP). The DWST tank has a capacity of 500,000 gallons and the level      Should augmentation to the normal DWST makeup method be required, another has historically been maintained between 65 and 90        historical example is provided. On February 23, 2012 at 0235, it was discovered that percent full. There have been instances, including        the normal makeup source was lost, forcing the site to bring in portable equipment to one earlier this year, where WBN Unit 1 was              replenish the CSTs. The equipment was in place and operating on the same day at maintained in Mode 3 for more than two days using        2105 or approximately 18.5 hours following the loss. The portable trailers are capable the DWST and the MWTP.                                    of providing 200 gpm to the CST. The procedure 0-SOI-59.01 Section 8.4, provides Page 15 of 64
There is adequate clean water to support a unit being maintained on AFW for 48 hours. The capacity of each of the two CSTs is 395,000 gallons and the normal maximum volume in the CSTs is approximately 385,000 gallons. Review of operational data for the past five years shows that the WBN Unit 1 CST has been maintained at approximately 330,000 gallons. Because AFW is not the only system that uses CST water, a standpipe is provided in the tank to assure that a minimum of 200,000 gallons of water is available for the sole use of AFW.
Thus, the site maintains approximately 130,000 gallons of water in the CST above the TS limit.
Normal make-up to the CST comes from the Demineralized Water Storage (DWST) Tank and the Make-up Water Treatment Plant (MWTP). The DWST tank has a capacity of 500,000 gallons and the level has historically been maintained between 65 and 90 percent full. There have been instances, including one earlier this year, where WBN Unit 1 was maintained in Mode 3 for more than two days using the DWST and the MWTP.
: a. The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) is sized to provide seven hours of clean water (200,000 gallons). This assumes maintaining operation in Mode 3 for two hours and then cooling down for five hours at 50 degrees per hour. At seven hours post trip, the required amount for AFW flow is 175 gpm. An extrapolation of this amount for the remaining 41 hours would result in the conclusion that approximately 430,500 gallons of clean water would be required to feed AFW.
This estimate is very conservative in that maintaining a stable level requires much less water than cooling down and also in the fact that this level does not account for the slow decay of AFW flow required over the period. As an example, at the 48 hour point, only approximately 110 gpm is required to satisfy the AFW demand.
: b. Normal makeup to the CST is provided from vendor operated equipment. Clean water is produced and added to the Demineralized Water Storage Tank (DWST). The capacity of the normal makeup system is sufficient to maintain CST inventory for extended continued operation in Mode 3 or 4.
As an actual example, in 2014, WBN was maintained in Mode 3 for the period from July 13 at 1937 to July 15 at 0503. During the first 27 hours, the normal makeup system to the CST maintained CST level at the normal level of 325,000 gallons while supplying the required AFW flow in Mode 3. The level did decrease during the final five hours of Mode 3 operation, but this decrease was due to increased water usage associated with feed and bleed on the condensate system to establish secondary parameters to support plant startup.
Thus, for a normal extended operation in Mode 4, such as one in which the plant cannot continue into Mode 5 due to inability to establish the required CCS and ERCW alignments to support entry into Mode 5, the normal DWST makeup to the CST will be used to replenish the CST inventory with clean water.
Should augmentation to the normal DWST makeup method be required, another historical example is provided. On February 23, 2012 at 0235, it was discovered that the normal makeup source was lost, forcing the site to bring in portable equipment to replenish the CSTs. The equipment was in place and operating on the same day at 2105 or approximately 18.5 hours following the loss. The portable trailers are capable of providing 200 gpm to the CST. The procedure 0-SOI-59.01 Section 8.4, provides  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted guidance for placing portable trailers in-service.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 16 of 64
WBN recently added the Auxiliary Feedwater Storage Tank (AFWST) as part of the FLEX                 In all cases, the following guidance is provided in the Annunciator Response mitigating strategies. This tank has a capacity of        Instructions (ARI). The low level alarm for the CSTs comes in at 210,000 gallons. The 500,000 gallons and is an immediately available          response to this alarm is contained in procedure 1/2-ARI-36-42. Below is the wording source of clean water. The tank was designed to be        associated with low level response for Unit 1. The Unit 2 instruction is identical with the seismically robust and to withstand the effects of        exception of switching the designated tanks (A for B and B for A).
Item No.
tornados. The AFWST supply piping is normally isolated by air operated valves (AOVs) from the Unit  [3] IF level is low, THEN, REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6), and INITIATE makeup to 1 and Unit 2 condensate piping that supply the            CST A from one of the following sources as listed in preferred order:
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted WBN recently added the Auxiliary Feedwater Storage Tank (AFWST) as part of the FLEX mitigating strategies. This tank has a capacity of 500,000 gallons and is an immediately available source of clean water. The tank was designed to be seismically robust and to withstand the effects of tornados. The AFWST supply piping is normally isolated by air operated valves (AOVs) from the Unit 1 and Unit 2 condensate piping that supply the suction for the AFW pumps. The AOVs open on a low pressure signal from the upstream condensate piping, a loss of AC power, or a loss of control air.
suction for the AFW pumps. The AOVs open on a low          [3.1] From CST B per SOI-2&3.01, CONDENSATE AND FEEDWATER SYSTEM pressure signal from the upstream condensate                [3.2] From DI Water Storage Tank per SOI-59.01, DEMINERALIZED WATER piping, a loss of AC power, or a loss of control air.            SYSTEM.
Water can be transferred from the DWST to the AFWST using hoses and pumps that are maintained by the FLEX program if power cannot be provided to the DWST booster pumps. The two CSTs have a cross tie that when opened provides an additional approximately 330,000 gallons of clean water for the case of a LOCA on one unit and the other unit being shutdown.
Water can be transferred from the DWST to the AFWST using hoses and pumps that are maintained          Makeup from the opposite unit CST is specified as the first response, as the normal by the FLEX program if power cannot be provided to        makeup to the CST is from the Demin Water System. Receipt of this alarm will not the DWST booster pumps. The two CSTs have a              normally be expected if the normal method remains available as the capacity of the cross tie that when opened provides an additional        Demin makeup system exceeds the requirements for AFW flow.
NRC Questions:
approximately 330,000 gallons of clean water for the case of a LOCA on one unit and the other unit being      The CST LoLo level alarm comes in at approximately 11,600 gallons. The actions shutdown.                                                specified for this alarm are.
: a. Provide the total expected water volumes of clean water to support operations of the AFW system for the 48 hour durations.
NRC Questions:                                        [1] REDUCE demand from CST, if possible.
: b. Provide the procedure steps (alarm responses, AOPs, EOPs, etc) that direct operators to supplement the Unit 1 CST clean water supply from the new Flex tank, opposite units CST and DWST (in front of the ERCW automatic switchover).
: a. Provide the total expected water volumes  [2] MAKEUP to CST A at maximum possible rate.
: c. Provide access to the design change package for the addition of the new Flex tank. This should include the 50.59 guidance for placing portable trailers in-service.
of clean water to support operations of  [3] IF AFW Pumps are running, THEN the AFW system for the 48 hour                MONITOR the following:
In all cases, the following guidance is provided in the Annunciator Response Instructions (ARI). The low level alarm for the CSTs comes in at 210,000 gallons. The response to this alarm is contained in procedure 1/2-ARI-36-42. Below is the wording associated with low level response for Unit 1. The Unit 2 instruction is identical with the exception of switching the designated tanks (A for B and B for A).
durations.                                        x AFW Storage Tank (AFWST) level decrease.
[3] IF level is low, THEN, REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6), and INITIATE makeup to CST A from one of the following sources as listed in preferred order:
: b. Provide the procedure steps (alarm                  x AFW Pump Suction Valves for swap to ERCW Discharge Header suction.
[3.1] From CST B per SOI-2&3.01, CONDENSATE AND FEEDWATER SYSTEM
responses, AOPs, EOPs, etc) that direct  [4] REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6).
[3.2] From DI Water Storage Tank per SOI-59.01, DEMINERALIZED WATER SYSTEM.
operators to supplement the Unit 1 CST clean water supply from the new Flex        These actions acknowledge that if continued AFW demand is required and adequate tank, opposite units CST and DWST (in      clean water makeup can not be established, the crew should ensure that the safety front of the ERCW automatic switchover). related supply to AFW (ERCW) properly aligns to supply AFW needs when required.
Makeup from the opposite unit CST is specified as the first response, as the normal makeup to the CST is from the Demin Water System. Receipt of this alarm will not normally be expected if the normal method remains available as the capacity of the Demin makeup system exceeds the requirements for AFW flow.
: c. Provide access to the design change package for the addition of the new Flex e. The following changes will be addressed in the FSAR.
The CST LoLo level alarm comes in at approximately 11,600 gallons. The actions specified for this alarm are.
tank. This should include the 50.59 Page 16 of 64
[1] REDUCE demand from CST, if possible.
[2] MAKEUP to CST A at maximum possible rate.
[3] IF AFW Pumps are running, THEN MONITOR the following:
x AFW Storage Tank (AFWST) level decrease.
x AFW Pump Suction Valves for swap to ERCW Discharge Header suction.
[4] REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6).
These actions acknowledge that if continued AFW demand is required and adequate clean water makeup can not be established, the crew should ensure that the safety related supply to AFW (ERCW) properly aligns to supply AFW needs when required.
: e. The following changes will be addressed in the FSAR.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item               NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                      Date Posted reviews performed, P&ID drawings,       9.2.6.1 Design Bases piping isometrics, piping safety classification and new AOVs logic.           The condensate storage facilities are designed to serve as a receiver of water from
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 17 of 64
: d. Describe how the new Flex tank                the main condenser high level dump and to provide treated water for makeup to the automatic switchover and ERCW                main condenser while reserving a minimum amount for the auxiliary feedwater automatic switchover interact.              system. This amount is required to hold the plant for two hours after a Design Basis Specifically, the set-point differences      Event (DBE) and 5 hours to cool RCS from no-load hot standby at 50&deg;F per hour to should be described.                        the point at which the residual heat removal system can take over.
Item No.
: e. Based on the response above, describe any necessary changes to the UFSAR,          When the CSTs are intact and offsite power is available, the inventory available in TS, and TS Bases based on this new          the CSTs plus makeup from the make-up water plant and the demineralized water required water volume.                      storage tank (FSAR Section 10.4), is capable of supplying clean water to support maintaining the plant on auxiliary feedwater for longer than seven hours without the Date Posted: 08/03/15                                  need to transfer the AFW pump suction to ERCW. No credit is taken for this additional water in the design and safety evaluations of condensate storage or AFW.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted reviews performed, P&ID drawings, piping isometrics, piping safety classification and new AOVs logic.
: d. Describe how the new Flex tank automatic switchover and ERCW automatic switchover interact.
Specifically, the set-point differences should be described.
: e. Based on the response above, describe any necessary changes to the UFSAR, TS, and TS Bases based on this new required water volume.
Date Posted: 08/03/15 9.2.6.1 Design Bases The condensate storage facilities are designed to serve as a receiver of water from the main condenser high level dump and to provide treated water for makeup to the main condenser while reserving a minimum amount for the auxiliary feedwater system. This amount is required to hold the plant for two hours after a Design Basis Event (DBE) and 5 hours to cool RCS from no-load hot standby at 50&deg;F per hour to the point at which the residual heat removal system can take over.
When the CSTs are intact and offsite power is available, the inventory available in the CSTs plus makeup from the make-up water plant and the demineralized water storage tank (FSAR Section 10.4), is capable of supplying clean water to support maintaining the plant on auxiliary feedwater for longer than seven hours without the need to transfer the AFW pump suction to ERCW. No credit is taken for this additional water in the design and safety evaluations of condensate storage or AFW.
The condensate storage tanks are not an engineered safety feature and are not seismically qualified. The supply from the make-up water tank and the demineralized water storage tank and associated piping are not engineered safety features and are not seismically qualified. The storage tanks supply the preferred source of water to the auxiliary feedwater system, but the engineered safety feature source is the ERCW System (Safety Class 2b).
The condensate storage tanks are not an engineered safety feature and are not seismically qualified. The supply from the make-up water tank and the demineralized water storage tank and associated piping are not engineered safety features and are not seismically qualified. The storage tanks supply the preferred source of water to the auxiliary feedwater system, but the engineered safety feature source is the ERCW System (Safety Class 2b).
9.2.6.3 Safety Evaluation The condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water. The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b).
9.2.6.3 Safety Evaluation The condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water. The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b).
Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater for either unit can be obtained from both tanks. This will be done only if necessary since each condensate storage tank normally contains auxiliary feedwater for just one unit.
Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater for either unit can be obtained from both tanks. This will be done only if necessary since each condensate storage tank normally contains auxiliary feedwater for just one unit.
The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during events when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during events when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.
Piping connected to the condensate storage tanks is routed through a heated tunnel Page 17 of 64
Piping connected to the condensate storage tanks is routed through a heated tunnel  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted under the tanks. Ice formation in the tanks during a period of prolonged low temperatures can be prevented, if necessary, by recirculation of water through the condensate transfer pump. The tank and its connecting piping can accommodate water whose temperature is in the range of 40&deg;F to 130&deg;F.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 18 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted under the tanks. Ice formation in the tanks during a period of prolonged low temperatures can be prevented, if necessary, by recirculation of water through the condensate transfer pump. The tank and its connecting piping can accommodate water whose temperature is in the range of 40&deg;F to 130&deg;F.
10.4.9.2 System Description The two reactor units have separate AFW systems, as shown in Figure 10.4-21.
10.4.9.2 System Description The two reactor units have separate AFW systems, as shown in Figure 10.4-21.
Each system has two electric motor-driven pumps and one turbine-driven pump.
Each system has two electric motor-driven pumps and one turbine-driven pump.
Each of the electric pumps serves two steam generators; the turbine pump serves all four. All three pumps supporting a unit automatically deliver rated flow within one minute upon a trip of both turbine-driven main feedwater pumps, loss of offsite power, an AMSAC signal, a safety injection signal or low-low steam generator water level. The motor driven pumps (MDPs) start on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any steam generator and the turbine driven pump starts on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any two steam generators. Each pump supplies sufficient water for evaporative heat removal to prevent operation of the primary system relief valves or the uncovering of the core. The operator has the capability to open an additional recirculation line on the MDPs when there is low decay heat required to be removed from the SG. These lines contain a normally closed valve that closes on an accident signal. The valve is operable after the accident signal, but if an additional accident signal occurs, the valve would be reclosed. This ensures that the forward flow requirements to remove decay heat have been satisfied. Significant pump design parameters are given in Table 10.4-1.
Each of the electric pumps serves two steam generators; the turbine pump serves all four. All three pumps supporting a unit automatically deliver rated flow within one minute upon a trip of both turbine-driven main feedwater pumps, loss of offsite power, an AMSAC signal, a safety injection signal or low-low steam generator water level. The motor driven pumps (MDPs) start on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any steam generator and the turbine driven pump starts on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any two steam generators. Each pump supplies sufficient water for evaporative heat removal to prevent operation of the primary system relief valves or the uncovering of the core. The operator has the capability to open an additional recirculation line on the MDPs when there is low decay heat required to be removed from the SG. These lines contain a normally closed valve that closes on an accident signal. The valve is operable after the accident signal, but if an additional accident signal occurs, the valve would be reclosed. This ensures that the forward flow requirements to remove decay heat have been satisfied. Significant pump design parameters are given in Table 10.4-1.
The preferred sources of water for all auxiliary feedwater pumps are the two 395,000 gallon condensate storage tanks. A minimum of 200,000 gallons in each tank is reserved for the AFW Systems by means of a standpipe through which other systems are supplied. The two CSTs are normally isolated from each other, with one CST dedicated to each unit. The AFW safety analyses take no credit for the ability to crosstie the CSTs. As an unlimited backup water supply for each unit, a separate ERCW system header feeds each motor-driven pump. The turbine-driven pump can receive backup water from either ERCW header. The ERCW supply is automatically (or remote-manually) initiated on a two-out-of-three low pressure signal in the AFW system suction lines. Pump protection during the automatic transfer to the ERCW supplies is assured by providing sufficient suction head and flow to the pumps and is Page 18 of 64
The preferred sources of water for all auxiliary feedwater pumps are the two 395,000 gallon condensate storage tanks. A minimum of 200,000 gallons in each tank is reserved for the AFW Systems by means of a standpipe through which other systems are supplied. The two CSTs are normally isolated from each other, with one CST dedicated to each unit. The AFW safety analyses take no credit for the ability to crosstie the CSTs. As an unlimited backup water supply for each unit, a separate ERCW system header feeds each motor-driven pump. The turbine-driven pump can receive backup water from either ERCW header. The ERCW supply is automatically (or remote-manually) initiated on a two-out-of-three low pressure signal in the AFW system suction lines. Pump protection during the automatic transfer to the ERCW supplies is assured by providing sufficient suction head and flow to the pumps and is  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted verified by system analysis. Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except when the condensate supply is unavailable.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 19 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted verified by system analysis. Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except when the condensate supply is unavailable.
In addition, the high pressure fire protection (HPFP) system which is cross-connected to the discharge of each motor driven AFW pump can be aligned to supply unlimited raw water directly to the steam generators, in the unlikely event of a flood above plant grade. Water from the HPFP system is supplied by four high pressure, vertical turbine, motor-driven, Seismic Category I pumps conforming to the requirements of ASME B&PV Code Section III, Class 3 with each having a rating of 1590 gpm at 300 feet head. These pumps are installed in the Seismic Category I Intake Pumping Station with motors above the maximum possible flood level. Each pump is capable of supplying 100% of the auxiliary feedwater demands for both units during a flood above plant grade. The four pumps are supplied from normal and emergency power with two pumps assigned to each of the two emergency power trains. Each pair of pumps on the same power train takes suction from a common sump which receives water through a settling baffle arrangement for all normal, and flood reservoir levels.
In addition, the high pressure fire protection (HPFP) system which is cross-connected to the discharge of each motor driven AFW pump can be aligned to supply unlimited raw water directly to the steam generators, in the unlikely event of a flood above plant grade. Water from the HPFP system is supplied by four high pressure, vertical turbine, motor-driven, Seismic Category I pumps conforming to the requirements of ASME B&PV Code Section III, Class 3 with each having a rating of 1590 gpm at 300 feet head. These pumps are installed in the Seismic Category I Intake Pumping Station with motors above the maximum possible flood level. Each pump is capable of supplying 100% of the auxiliary feedwater demands for both units during a flood above plant grade. The four pumps are supplied from normal and emergency power with two pumps assigned to each of the two emergency power trains. Each pair of pumps on the same power train takes suction from a common sump which receives water through a settling baffle arrangement for all normal, and flood reservoir levels.
Generated CR 1075753 to address interactions from a GDC-5 perspective for Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs and AFW storage tank. This CR has been posted to SharePoint.
Generated CR 1075753 to address interactions from a GDC-5 perspective for Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs and AFW storage tank. This CR has been posted to SharePoint.
BOP-12                                                 Tube plugging for the safety related heat exchangers are controlled by issued design output. These values may be found in the System Descriptions for System 70, Component What controls are in place to revisit flow calculations Cooling System (5%), System 72, Containment Spray System (10%), and System 74, to ensure assumed HX tube plugging and fouling          Residual Heat Removal System (5%).
: 12.
12.
BOP-12 What controls are in place to revisit flow calculations to ensure assumed HX tube plugging and fouling factors reflect actual HX degradation or required plugging?
factors reflect actual HX degradation or required plugging?                                              TVAs system descriptions are design output under the 10 CFR 50 Appendix B, Quality Assurance Program.
Tube plugging for the safety related heat exchangers are controlled by issued design output. These values may be found in the System Descriptions for System 70, Component Cooling System (5%), System 72, Containment Spray System (10%), and System 74, Residual Heat Removal System (5%).
BOP - 13                                               a)   CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train A:
TVAs system descriptions are design output under the 10 CFR 50 Appendix B, Quality Assurance Program.
The licensee is requested to provide the following
: 13.
: 13. information:                                                                                          Heat Load Item With the loss of Train A:                                                                              (Btu/hr) a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand              RHR Heat Exchanger                     54,800,000 on the CCS C heat exchanger to mitigate a Page 19 of 64
BOP - 13 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:
With the loss of Train A:
a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS C heat exchanger to mitigate a a)
CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train A:
Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)
RHR Heat Exchanger 54,800,000


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item           NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                  Date Posted design basis accident (loss of coolant           Centrifugal Charging Pump              66,760 accident with a loss of offsite power and RHR Pump                              100,000 failure of Train A)? And what is the corresponding required ERCW flow rate and         Safety Injection Pump                  46,000 CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal     Radiation Monitor                            0 demand?
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 20 of 64
Containment Spray Pump                  14,746 b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate             Total                              55,027,506 required to be sent to the Containment Spray Heat Exchanger 1B or 2B?                       Train B ERCW Flows are NOT separated by unit. The total required Train B ERCW flow to the CCS HX C for one unit in LOCA-Recirculation and the other unit in Hot c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow      Shutdown for less than 48 hours is provided below.
Item No.
rate to the operating EDGs?
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted design basis accident (loss of coolant accident with a loss of offsite power and failure of Train A)? And what is the corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal demand?
CCS       ERCW Flow d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow                    Item                Flow     to CCS HX rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a                                      (gpm)        C (gpm) heat sink for the spent fuel pools?              RHR Heat Exchanger               5,000     9,200 e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow        Centrifugal Charging Pump           28 rate to the other safety related ERCW loads      RHR Pump                             10 for the LOCA unit?                                Safety Injection Pump               15 Radiation Monitor                     6 Containment Spray Pump               2 Total                             5,061 b) For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c) For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d) CCS HX A: 1,370 gpm e) Concurrent ERCW flow rates to other safety-related loads for LOCA unit:
b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate required to be sent to the Containment Spray Heat Exchanger 1B or 2B?
Page 20 of 64
c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the operating EDGs?
d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a heat sink for the spent fuel pools?
e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit?
Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 46,000 Radiation Monitor 0
Containment Spray Pump 14,746 Total 55,027,506 Train B ERCW Flows are NOT separated by unit. The total required Train B ERCW flow to the CCS HX C for one unit in LOCA-Recirculation and the other unit in Hot Shutdown for less than 48 hours is provided below.
Item CCS Flow (gpm)
ERCW Flow to CCS HX C (gpm)
RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 9,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Radiation Monitor 6
Containment Spray Pump 2
Total 5,061 b)
For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c)
For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d)
CCS HX A: 1,370 gpm e)
Concurrent ERCW flow rates to other safety-related loads for LOCA unit:  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item               NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted ERCW Item                            Flow (gpm)
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 21 of 64
Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common)             300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common)               240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit 560.0 Common)
Item No.
Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor 3.5 (Unit Common) 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common)                     12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common)                       1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common)                           10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common)                       900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area 60.0 Cooler (Unit Common)
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Item ERCW Flow (gpm)
AFW & Component Cooling System Area 102.0 Cooler (Unit Common)
Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common) 240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 560.0 Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor (Unit Common) 3.5 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common) 900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area Cooler (Unit Common) 60.0 AFW & Component Cooling System Area Cooler (Unit Common) 102.0 Emergency Gas Treatment System Room Cooler (Unit Common) 10.0 Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster Pumps Area Cooler (Unit Common) 29.0 Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler 28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler 22.0 Total 2,372.1
Emergency Gas Treatment System Room 10.0 Cooler (Unit Common)
: 14.
Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster 29.0 Pumps Area Cooler (Unit Common)
BOP 1 Clarification Question The total CCS flow is stated to be 5061 GPM to each Spent fuel pool cooling is provided by the 1B-B CCS pump through the A CCS HX which is realigned later in the event. The flow for the spent fuel pool is therefore not included in the C CCS HX flow.  
Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler                       28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler                   25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler                   12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler                   11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler                   12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler                                   15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler                                     19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler                       22.0 Total                                               2,372.1 BOP 1 Clarification Question                 Spent fuel pool cooling is provided by the 1B-B CCS pump through the A CCS HX which
: 14.                                                    is realigned later in the event. The flow for the spent fuel pool is therefore not included in The total CCS flow is stated to be 5061 GPM to each the C CCS HX flow.
Page 21 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                            Date Posted unit in BOP-12 and BOP-13.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 22 of 64
TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability Is additional CCS flow to CCS HX A or B required for in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours.
Item No.
Spent Fuel Pool cooling and how much? What will then be the required total CCS flow from the CCS B Train when in the plant conditions described in BOP-12 and BOP-13?
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted unit in BOP-12 and BOP-13.
BOP - 14                                              a)    CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train A:
Is additional CCS flow to CCS HX A or B required for Spent Fuel Pool cooling and how much? What will then be the required total CCS flow from the CCS B Train when in the plant conditions described in BOP-12 and BOP-13?
The licensee is requested to provide the following                                           Heat Load Item information:                                                                                   (Btu/hr)
TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours.
With a loss of Train A:                                       RHR HX                        89,265,200 a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand             Centrifugal Charging Pump          66,760 on the CCS C heat exchanger to maintain a         RHR Pump                          100,000 unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit achieved         Safety Injection Pump                      0 Mode 4 in the minimum amount of time after         Containment Spray Pump                    0 shutdown? And what is the corresponding           Radiation Monitor                          0 ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet           Total                          89,431,960 this peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal?     ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam 15.
: 15.
generators are not in use for heat removal:
BOP - 14 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:
b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads      Note: Even though certain non-accident unit pumps may not be running (no heat for the Mode 4 unit?                              load), they may still receive CCS cooling water flow.
With a loss of Train A:
CCS         ERCW Flow Item                Flow        to CCS HX (gpm)          C (gpm)
a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS C heat exchanger to maintain a unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit achieved Mode 4 in the minimum amount of time after shutdown? And what is the corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal?
RHR Heat Exchanger                 5,000       9,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump             28 RHR Pump                             10 Safety Injection Pump                 15 Radiation Monitor                       6 Page 22 of 64
b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit?
a)
CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train A:
Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)
RHR HX 89,265,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 0
Containment Spray Pump 0
Radiation Monitor 0
Total 89,431,960 ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal:
Note: Even though certain non-accident unit pumps may not be running (no heat load), they may still receive CCS cooling water flow.
Item CCS Flow (gpm)
ERCW Flow to CCS HX C (gpm)
RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 9,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Radiation Monitor 6


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted Containment Spray Pump                 2 Total                             5,061 b)   Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 23 of 64
ERCW Item Flow (gpm)
Item No.
ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common)                                         6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common)                                         0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common)                                         10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler                                 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler                                 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler                                 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler                                 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler                                                 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler                                                   19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*                   46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*                 612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*             248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*         220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load)             30.0 Total                                                               1,266.8
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Containment Spray Pump 2
* These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.
Total 5,061 b)
Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:
Item ERCW Flow (gpm)
ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*
46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*
612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*
248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*
220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load) 30.0 Total 1,266.8 These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.
During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.
During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.
BOP 14 - 1                                             TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability Please clarify the simultaneous validity of the         in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours.
: 16.
following statements as submitted by TVA and
BOP 14 - 1 Please clarify the simultaneous validity of the following statements as submitted by TVA and respond to the following questions.
: 16. respond to the following questions.
x Page E1-5 of the {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=June 17, 2015, letter}} states that the RHR system is normally placed in service TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours.
x   Page E1-5 of the June 17, 2015, letter states that the RHR system is normally placed in service Page 23 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted four hours after reactor shutdown.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 24 of 64
x   Page E1-4 of the July 14 submittal states that it will be approximately 7 hours before RHR is placed in service.
Item No.
x   TVA response to NRC Audit Review Questions BOP-14 states that the peak heat removal rate from the RHR heat Exchanger for a unit in Mode 4 with a loss of Train A is 89,265,200 BTU/hr.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted four hours after reactor shutdown.
x Page E1-4 of the July 14 submittal states that it will be approximately 7 hours before RHR is placed in service.
x TVA response to NRC Audit Review Questions BOP-14 states that the peak heat removal rate from the RHR heat Exchanger for a unit in Mode 4 with a loss of Train A is 89,265,200 BTU/hr.
A) Is 89,265,200 BTU/hr applicable to 4 hours or 7 hours after shutdown of the non-accident unit?
A) Is 89,265,200 BTU/hr applicable to 4 hours or 7 hours after shutdown of the non-accident unit?
B) With RHR in service 4 hours after shutdown of the non-accident unit, how is removal of residual heat from the non-accident unit assured between hours 4 and 7 after shutdown?
B) With RHR in service 4 hours after shutdown of the non-accident unit, how is removal of residual heat from the non-accident unit assured between hours 4 and 7 after shutdown?
BOP - 15                                               a) CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train B:
: 17.
The licensee is requested to provide the following information:                                                                                     Heat Load Item With a loss of Train B:                                                                           (Btu/hr) a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand           RHR Heat Exchanger                  54,800,000 on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to               Centrifugal Charging Pump                66,760
BOP - 15 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:
: 17.          mitigate a design basis accident (loss of         RHR Pump                                100,000 coolant accident with a loss of offsite power     Safety Injection Pump                    46,000 and failure of Train B)? And what is the         Containment Spray Pump                    14,746 corresponding required ERCW flow rate and         Seal Water Heat Exchanger              941,000 CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal     Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat demand?                                                                                          0 Exchanger
With a loss of Train B:
* Sample Heat Exchanger A                       0 b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate Page 24 of 64
a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to mitigate a design basis accident (loss of coolant accident with a loss of offsite power and failure of Train B)? And what is the corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal demand?
b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate a)
CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train B:
Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)
RHR Heat Exchanger 54,800,000 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 46,000 Containment Spray Pump 14,746 Seal Water Heat Exchanger 941,000 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger
* 0 Sample Heat Exchanger A 0


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item           NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                  Date Posted required to be sent to the Containment Spray   Sample Heat Exchanger B                        0 Heat Exchanger 1A or 2A?                       Sample Heat Exchanger C                        0 Hot Sample Chiller Package                      0 c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow     Radiation Monitor                              0 rate to the operating EDGs?                   Waste Gas Compressor                    135,135 Total                                56,103,641 d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 25 of 64
* There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger heat sink for the spent fuel pools?              during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.
Item No.
e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads  Corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat for the LOCA unit?                          removal demand:
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted required to be sent to the Containment Spray Heat Exchanger 1A or 2A?
CCS Flow     ERCW Item (gpm)     (gpm)
c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the operating EDGs?
RHR Heat Exchanger                                   5,000   4,000 Centrifugal Charging Pump                               28 RHR Pump                                               10 Safety Injection Pump                                   15 Containment Spray Pump                                   2 Seal Water Heat Exchanger                             200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger             1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A                                 20 Sample Heat Exchanger B                                 28 Sample Heat Exchanger C                                 20 Hot Sample Chiller Package                             22 Radiation Monitor                                       6 Waste Gas Compressor                                   50 Spent Fuel Pool Hx**                               ~2,000 Total                                               8,401
d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a heat sink for the spent fuel pools?
* There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.
e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit?
Page 25 of 64
Sample Heat Exchanger B 0
Sample Heat Exchanger C 0
Hot Sample Chiller Package 0
Radiation Monitor 0
Waste Gas Compressor 135,135 Total 56,103,641 There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.
Corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal demand:
Item CCS Flow (gpm)
ERCW (gpm)
RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 4,000 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Containment Spray Pump 2
Seal Water Heat Exchanger 200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 20 Sample Heat Exchanger B 28 Sample Heat Exchanger C 20 Hot Sample Chiller Package 22 Radiation Monitor 6
Waste Gas Compressor 50 Spent Fuel Pool Hx**  
~2,000 Total 8,401 There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 26 of 64
                                              **   CCS Train 2A only (flow exists however it is not required) b)   For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c)   For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d)   This is not separately available. The required ERCW flow is included in the non-accident CCS Heat Exchanger flow, i.e., 5,050 gpm for > 48 hours; 7,100 gpm for < 48 hours.
Item No.
e)   Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit:
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted  
ERCW Item                                      Flow (gpm)
** CCS Train 2A only (flow exists however it is not required) b)
Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common)                                   300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common)                                     240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit Common)                                   560.0 Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor (Unit Common)                           3.5 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common)                                           12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common)                                             1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common)                                                 10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common)                                             900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area Cooler (Unit Common)                       60.0 AFW & Component Cooling System Area Cooler (Unit Common)                     102.0 Emergency Gas Treatment System Room Cooler (Unit Common)                       10.0 Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster Pumps Area Cooler (Unit 29.0 Common)
For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c)
Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler                                             28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler                                         25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler                                         12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler                                         11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler                                         12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler                                                         15.0 Page 26 of 64
For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d)
This is not separately available. The required ERCW flow is included in the non-accident CCS Heat Exchanger flow, i.e., 5,050 gpm for > 48 hours; 7,100 gpm for < 48 hours.
e)
Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit:
Item ERCW Flow (gpm)
Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common) 240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 560.0 Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor (Unit Common) 3.5 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common) 900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area Cooler (Unit Common) 60.0 AFW & Component Cooling System Area Cooler (Unit Common) 102.0 Emergency Gas Treatment System Room Cooler (Unit Common) 10.0 Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster Pumps Area Cooler (Unit Common) 29.0 Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler 28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted RHR Pump Room Cooler                                                       19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler                                           22.0 Total                                                                   2,372.1 BOP - 16                                             a) CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate to maintain one unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train B:
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 27 of 64
The licensee is requested to provide the following information:                                                                                               Heat Load Item With a loss of Train B:                                                                                       (Btu/hr) a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand       RHR Heat Exchanger                                  89,265,200 on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to             Centrifugal Charging Pump                                66,760 maintain a unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit     RHR Pump                                                100,000 achieved Mode 4 in the minimum amount of         Safety Injection Pump                                          0 time after shutdown? And what is the             Containment Spray Pump                                        0 corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow       Seal Water Heat Exchanger                              517,000 rate to meet this peak heat removal rate         Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger              2,530,000 assuming steam generators are not in use for     Sample Heat Exchanger A                                        0 heat removal?
Item No.
Sample Heat Exchanger B                                        0 Sample Heat Exchanger C                                        0
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler 22.0 Total 2,372.1
: 18.      b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow Hot Sample Chiller Package                                    0 rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit?                             Radiation Monitor                                             0 Waste Gas Compressor                                           0 Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger                       21,000,000 Total                                             113,478,960 Corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal:
: 18.
CCS       ERCW Item                          Flow      Flow (gpm)     (gpm)
BOP - 16 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:
RHR Heat Exchanger                                 5,000       7,100 Centrifugal Charging Pump                               28 RHR Pump                                               10 Page 27 of 64
With a loss of Train B:
a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to maintain a unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit achieved Mode 4 in the minimum amount of time after shutdown? And what is the corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal?
b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit?
a)
CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate to maintain one unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train B:
Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)
RHR Heat Exchanger 89,265,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 0
Containment Spray Pump 0
Seal Water Heat Exchanger 517,000 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 2,530,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 0
Sample Heat Exchanger B 0
Sample Heat Exchanger C 0
Hot Sample Chiller Package 0
Radiation Monitor 0
Waste Gas Compressor 0
Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger 21,000,000 Total 113,478,960 Corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal:
Item CCS Flow (gpm)
ERCW Flow (gpm)
RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 7,100 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted Safety Injection Pump                                 15 Containment Spray Pump                                 2 Seal Water Heat Exchanger                             200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger           1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A                               20 Sample Heat Exchanger B                               28 Sample Heat Exchanger C                               20 Hot Sample Chiller Package                             22 Radiation Monitor                                       6 Waste Gas Compressor                                   50 Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger                     2,000 Total                                             8,401 b)   Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 28 of 64
ERCW Item                                Flow (gpm)
Item No.
ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common)                                       6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common)                                       0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common)                                       10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler                               25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler                               12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler                               11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler                               10.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler                                               15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler                                                 19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*                 46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*               612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*           248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*       220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load)           30.0 Total                                                             1,264.8 Page 28 of 64
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Safety Injection Pump 15 Containment Spray Pump 2
Seal Water Heat Exchanger 200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 20 Sample Heat Exchanger B 28 Sample Heat Exchanger C 20 Hot Sample Chiller Package 22 Radiation Monitor 6
Waste Gas Compressor 50 Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger 2,000 Total 8,401 b)
Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:
Item ERCW Flow (gpm)
ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 10.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*
46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*
612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*
248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*
220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load) 30.0 Total 1,264.8


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 29 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
* These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.
* These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.
During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.
During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.
BOP - 17                                               The 48 hour time-delay was selected due to limitations in the CCS and the ERCW System to simultaneously mitigate a design basis LOCA on one unit and remove core decay heat The licensee has stated on page E1-10 of the June     from the non-accident unit when the non-accident unit was relying on RHR to remove core 17, 2015, submittal:                                   decay heat. After 48 hours, the non-accident unit core decay heat is sufficiently low
: 19.
(~ 56.7 MBtu/hr) that the CCS and the ERCW System can support both the accident and once Unit 1 has been shutdown for 48 hours   non-accident units with any single active failure. The actual time delays vary depending or more, the total ERCW heat removal and     on system availability and the single active failure postulated between CCS and the
BOP - 17 The licensee has stated on page E1-10 of the June 17, 2015, submittal:
: 19.          thus, flow requirements, drop below the       ERCW System. The most limiting time delay is 48 hours due to the availability of only one flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.        CCS pump aligned to CCS HX C.
once Unit 1 has been shutdown for 48 hours or more, the total ERCW heat removal and thus, flow requirements, drop below the flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.
Provide the reasons for the 48 hour time by identifying the heat load on the ERCW system from the shutdown unit and from the LOCA unit at time 48 hours and explain how two ERCW pumps provides adequate flow at this time.
Provide the reasons for the 48 hour time by identifying the heat load on the ERCW system from the shutdown unit and from the LOCA unit at time 48 hours and explain how two ERCW pumps provides adequate flow at this time.
BOP - 18                                               The scenario postulates a case where a single failure does not remove a complete train of electrical power and poses the question whether a second ERCW pump would be The licensee has stated on page E1-11 of the June      required on a single train to supply sufficient flow. This scenario has not been explicitly 17, 2015, submittal:                                  analyzed. However, for this event, three ERCW pumps would be available for cooldown, with two ERCW pumps on one train and one ERCW pump on the other train. In addition, The requirement to have two ERCW pumps      at least three CCS HXs are available with multiple CCS pumps. Qualitatively, the running on one DG is required for the        following table compares the two scenarios:
The 48 hour time-delay was selected due to limitations in the CCS and the ERCW System to simultaneously mitigate a design basis LOCA on one unit and remove core decay heat from the non-accident unit when the non-accident unit was relying on RHR to remove core decay heat. After 48 hours, the non-accident unit core decay heat is sufficiently low
scenario of a LOCA on one unit and the other
(~ 56.7 MBtu/hr) that the CCS and the ERCW System can support both the accident and non-accident units with any single active failure. The actual time delays vary depending on system availability and the single active failure postulated between CCS and the ERCW System. The most limiting time delay is 48 hours due to the availability of only one CCS pump aligned to CCS HX C.
: 20.          unit cooled by RHR within 48 hours of                                    3 ERCW Pumps on           3 ERCW Pumps Item shutdown. The single failure of a loss of a                                      1 Train              on 2 Trains train of power must also occur to require two    ERCW Pumps ERCW pumps to be loaded on a single DG.                                  3                       3 Available Other single failures including the loss of a                            High Flow Velocities     Low Flow Velocities DG or a 6.9 kV shutdown board will not          ERCW Flow
: 20.
                                                                                          / Resistance            / Resistance require two ERCW pumps to be loaded on a        CCS HXs Available       1 or 2                   3 single DG.
BOP - 18 The licensee has stated on page E1-11 of the June 17, 2015, submittal:
Page 29 of 64
The requirement to have two ERCW pumps running on one DG is required for the scenario of a LOCA on one unit and the other unit cooled by RHR within 48 hours of shutdown. The single failure of a loss of a train of power must also occur to require two ERCW pumps to be loaded on a single DG.
Other single failures including the loss of a DG or a 6.9 kV shutdown board will not require two ERCW pumps to be loaded on a single DG.
The scenario postulates a case where a single failure does not remove a complete train of electrical power and poses the question whether a second ERCW pump would be required on a single train to supply sufficient flow. This scenario has not been explicitly analyzed. However, for this event, three ERCW pumps would be available for cooldown, with two ERCW pumps on one train and one ERCW pump on the other train. In addition, at least three CCS HXs are available with multiple CCS pumps. Qualitatively, the following table compares the two scenarios:
Item 3 ERCW Pumps on 1 Train 3 ERCW Pumps on 2 Trains ERCW Pumps Available 3
3 ERCW Flow High Flow Velocities  
/ Resistance Low Flow Velocities  
/ Resistance CCS HXs Available 1 or 2 3  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted For the above scenario with a loss of a single Train A   CCS Pump 3 maximum              3 or 4 DG or Train A ERCW pump, where one Train A               Available ERCW pump is running and two Train B ERCW                                           High Flow Velocities  Lower Velocity for pumps are running:                                       CCS Flow for Train B            Train B RHR HXs Available        2 maximum              3 or 4 Has this scenario been analyzed to demonstrate that       SFP HXs Available        0 for Train B          2 a second ERCW pump on a DG will not be required as stated? If so, describe the assumptions and         By comparison, it can be seen that the failure of one DG or one ERCW pump results in results of this analysis.                              more equipment available than in the limiting case of a loss of an entire train of 6.9 kV shutdown boards. Therefore, conditions are more favorable for cooldown.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 30 of 64
BOP - 19                                               The adequacy of two ERCW pumps per train and one CCS pump per train to removal all decay heat from both units for the scenarios provided by the NRC cannot be assured The licensee has stated on page E1-4 of the July 14,   under all worst case conditions. Therefore, the Applicability Note of TS 3.7.16 and 2015 letter:                                           TS 3.7.17 will be revised by the removal of part b regarding the condition of the opposite unit. The proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 will be provided in a separate When the assumptions include a loss of offsite     submittal.
Item No.
power and the loss of Train A power, two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B         In light of this information and the removal of TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 Applicability Note b, header and in operation when RHR is in service on   the third paragraph of the response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 2 provided in both units and both units have been shutdown for   TVA letter to NRC, dated July 14, 2015, page E1-4, is revised as follows:
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted For the above scenario with a loss of a single Train A DG or Train A ERCW pump, where one Train A ERCW pump is running and two Train B ERCW pumps are running:
less than 48 hours.
Has this scenario been analyzed to demonstrate that a second ERCW pump on a DG will not be required as stated? If so, describe the assumptions and results of this analysis.
When the assumptions include a loss of offsite power and the loss of Train A power,
CCS Pump Available 3 maximum 3 or 4 CCS Flow High Flow Velocities for Train B Lower Velocity for Train B RHR HXs Available 2 maximum 3 or 4 SFP HXs Available 0 for Train B 2
: 21. TVA agrees that the submittal did not provide           two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B header and in operation when much discussion of the non-accident case because         RHR is in service on both units and both units have either unit has been shutdown for the LOCA plus shutdown case is more limiting.            less than 48 hours.
By comparison, it can be seen that the failure of one DG or one ERCW pump results in more equipment available than in the limiting case of a loss of an entire train of 6.9 kV shutdown boards. Therefore, conditions are more favorable for cooldown.
: 21.
BOP - 19 The licensee has stated on page E1-4 of the {{letter dated|date=July 14, 2015|text=July 14, 2015 letter}}:
When the assumptions include a loss of offsite power and the loss of Train A power, two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B header and in operation when RHR is in service on both units and both units have been shutdown for less than 48 hours.
TVA agrees that the submittal did not provide much discussion of the non-accident case because the LOCA plus shutdown case is more limiting.
There is discussion on pages E1-10 and E1-11 of the license amendment with respect to required ERCW pumps.
There is discussion on pages E1-10 and E1-11 of the license amendment with respect to required ERCW pumps.
The licensee has stated, in effect, if one unit has been shutdown for 48 hours or greater and the other unit has reached Mode 4 at the earliest opportunity, then TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 are sufficient without proposed TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
The licensee has stated, in effect, if one unit has been shutdown for 48 hours or greater and the other unit has reached Mode 4 at the earliest opportunity, then TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 are sufficient without proposed TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.
Page 30 of 64
The adequacy of two ERCW pumps per train and one CCS pump per train to removal all decay heat from both units for the scenarios provided by the NRC cannot be assured under all worst case conditions. Therefore, the Applicability Note of TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 will be revised by the removal of part b regarding the condition of the opposite unit. The proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 will be provided in a separate submittal.
In light of this information and the removal of TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 Applicability Note b, the third paragraph of the response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 2 provided in TVA letter to NRC, dated July 14, 2015, page E1-4, is revised as follows:
When the assumptions include a loss of offsite power and the loss of Train A power, two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B header and in operation when RHR is in service on both units and both units have either unit has been shutdown for less than 48 hours.


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted Accordingly, the staff requests TVA to address the heat removal requirements for Unit 2 shutdown at 48 hours and Unit 1 having just reached Mode 4 (approximately 7 hours after shutdown) and the following scenarios:
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 31 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Accordingly, the staff requests TVA to address the heat removal requirements for Unit 2 shutdown at 48 hours and Unit 1 having just reached Mode 4 (approximately 7 hours after shutdown) and the following scenarios:
: 1) DBA Unit 2 (LOCA/LOOP loss of Train A or B)
: 1) DBA Unit 2 (LOCA/LOOP loss of Train A or B)
Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to mitigate the DBA and maintain cool down on Unit1?
Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to mitigate the DBA and maintain cool down on Unit1?
Line 327: Line 483:
: 2) DBA (LOOP/Loss of Train A or B)
: 2) DBA (LOOP/Loss of Train A or B)
Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to maintain cool down on both units? Identify associated heat loads and CCS and ERCW flowrates.
Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to maintain cool down on both units? Identify associated heat loads and CCS and ERCW flowrates.
BOP - 20                                                 The values in FSAR Table 5.5-8 represent the design point of the RHR Heat Exchangers. This is just one set of conditions under which the RHR Heat Exchangers can The response to BOP-13 part (a) listed the heat load    operate. With one (1) RHR Heat Exchanger removing a core decay heat of ~ 89.4 on the RHR heat exchanger as 89,265,200 Btu/hr          MBtu/hr, one set of flow and temperature conditions for Loss of Train A and Loss of Train with a CCS flow rate of 5000 gpm. FSAR Table 5.5-8      B, each, are as follows:
: 22.
(RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL SYSTEM COMPONENT DATA) lists the design heat removal                                        Loss of Train A       Loss of Train B capacity of the RHR heat exchanger as 37,400,000              Parameter            EPMJN010890,          EPMJN010890,
BOP - 20 The response to BOP-13 part (a) listed the heat load on the RHR heat exchanger as 89,265,200 Btu/hr with a CCS flow rate of 5000 gpm. FSAR Table 5.5-8 (RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL SYSTEM COMPONENT DATA) lists the design heat removal capacity of the RHR heat exchanger as 37,400,000 Btu/hr with a CCS design flow of approximately 5000 GPM.
: 22. Btu/hr with a CCS design flow of approximately 5000                                  Table C7.7.89         Table C7.5.9 GPM.                                                      CCS Inlet               108                    105 Temperature (&deg;F)
Explain how the RHR HX will transfer 89,265,200 Btu/hr as listed in BOP-13, including inlet and outlet temperatures on the shell and tubes sides and CCS and RC flow rates.
Explain how the RHR HX will transfer 89,265,200          CCS Outlet             144                    141 Btu/hr as listed in BOP-13, including inlet and outlet    Temperature (&deg;F) temperatures on the shell and tubes sides and CCS        CCS Flow (Mlbm/hr)     2.48                   2.48 and RC flow rates.                                        CCS Flow (gpm)         5,000                 5,000 RHR Inlet               239                    247 Temperature (&deg;F)
The values in FSAR Table 5.5-8 represent the design point of the RHR Heat Exchangers. This is just one set of conditions under which the RHR Heat Exchangers can operate. With one (1) RHR Heat Exchanger removing a core decay heat of ~ 89.4 MBtu/hr, one set of flow and temperature conditions for Loss of Train A and Loss of Train B, each, are as follows:
Page 31 of 64
Parameter Loss of Train A EPMJN010890, Table C7.7.89 Loss of Train B EPMJN010890, Table C7.5.9 CCS Inlet Temperature (&deg;F) 108 105 CCS Outlet Temperature (&deg;F) 144 141 CCS Flow (Mlbm/hr) 2.48 2.48 CCS Flow (gpm) 5,000 5,000 RHR Inlet Temperature (&deg;F) 239 247


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                         Date Posted RHR Outlet             153                    148 Temperature (&deg;F)
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 32 of 64
RHR Flow (Mlbm/hr)     1.05                   0.90 RHR Flow (gpm)         2,146                 1,828 Core Decay Heat         89.4                   89.4 (MBtu/hr)
Item No.
UA (MBtu/(hr - &deg;F))     1.48                   1.43                   During actual plant operations, the CCS flow is set to approximately 5,000 gpm and the operators control the rate of cooldown and CCS outlet temperature from the RHR Heat Exchanger by manually throttling the RHR flow rate. All parameters (temperature, pressure, flow rate) are within the RHR Heat Exchanger design conditions as shown on the Vendor datasheets.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted During actual plant operations, the CCS flow is set to approximately 5,000 gpm and the operators control the rate of cooldown and CCS outlet temperature from the RHR Heat Exchanger by manually throttling the RHR flow rate. All parameters (temperature, pressure, flow rate) are within the RHR Heat Exchanger design conditions as shown on the Vendor datasheets.
BOP - 21
RHR Outlet Temperature (&deg;F) 153 148 RHR Flow (Mlbm/hr) 1.05 0.90 RHR Flow (gpm) 2,146 1,828 Core Decay Heat (MBtu/hr) 89.4 89.4 UA (MBtu/(hr - &deg;F))
: a. Based on Westinghouse analysis sensitivity runs using a UA of 2.0, the containment TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19,                pressure change is minimal (11.73 to 11.76 psig). TVA will docket the sensitivity Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix            analysis in support of the UA used in the TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19, C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, Tables E1 and          Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, E2.                                                      Tables E1 and E2.
1.48 1.43
(a) The total heat load on the CCS heat exchanger        The purpose of Appendix E was to develop a representative Heat Exchanger UA (HX) C stated in Table C7.7.69 is 144.72 MBtu/hr    value for use by Westinghouse in containment analyses. Since the Watts Bar C HX (sum of 89.4 MBtu/hr shutdown unit load,            is shared between the two units, Westinghouse needed to know what the effective 54.8 MBtu/hr LOCA unit load, and 0.53 MBtu/hr        part of the heat exchanger was supporting the unit having the LOCA. Appendix E miscellaneous loads) is more limiting than the      apportions the C HX UA value according to the percent mass flow going to the heat 23.
: 23.
total heat load of 112.03 MBtu/hr given in Table    exchanger from each unit.
BOP - 21 TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19, Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, Tables E1 and E2.
E1. Explain why the data in Table E1 is used to calculate the UA for the virtual CCS HXs for        Appendix E1 was started prior to the project to add a third ERCW pump to support the containment analysis and shutdown cooling            Hot Shutdown / LOCA-Recirculation mode of operation within 48 hours of a unit analysis.                                            shutdown. The flows and heat loads reflect two ERCW pumps in operation and after 48 hours from shutdown. Heat Exchanger UA values are a function of heat (b) In Table E2, the CCS virtual HX assigned for        exchanger geometry and flow and are not dependent on heat duty on the device.
(a) The total heat load on the CCS heat exchanger (HX) C stated in Table C7.7.69 is 144.72 MBtu/hr (sum of 89.4 MBtu/hr shutdown unit load, 54.8 MBtu/hr LOCA unit load, and 0.53 MBtu/hr miscellaneous loads) is more limiting than the total heat load of 112.03 MBtu/hr given in Table E1. Explain why the data in Table E1 is used to calculate the UA for the virtual CCS HXs for containment analysis and shutdown cooling analysis.
containment analysis has UA = 3.17 MBtu/hr&#xba;F        Using the lower two ERCW pump flow of 7,125 gpm would produce lower UA values which is consistent with the value used in          than the use of the higher 9,200 MBtu/hr flow from three ERCW pumps. Note that the Westinghouse containment analysis report in          LOCA containment analysis must support both two and three ERCW pumps in-Reference 1. What is the UA for the CCS virtual      service.
(b) In Table E2, the CCS virtual HX assigned for containment analysis has UA = 3.17 MBtu/hr&#xba;F which is consistent with the value used in Westinghouse containment analysis report in Reference 1. What is the UA for the CCS virtual HX assigned for shutdown cooling and how is it
HX assigned for shutdown cooling and how is it Page 32 of 64
: a. Based on Westinghouse analysis sensitivity runs using a UA of 2.0, the containment pressure change is minimal (11.73 to 11.76 psig). TVA will docket the sensitivity analysis in support of the UA used in the TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19, Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, Tables E1 and E2.
The purpose of Appendix E was to develop a representative Heat Exchanger UA value for use by Westinghouse in containment analyses. Since the Watts Bar C HX is shared between the two units, Westinghouse needed to know what the effective part of the heat exchanger was supporting the unit having the LOCA. Appendix E apportions the C HX UA value according to the percent mass flow going to the heat exchanger from each unit.
Appendix E1 was started prior to the project to add a third ERCW pump to support the Hot Shutdown / LOCA-Recirculation mode of operation within 48 hours of a unit shutdown. The flows and heat loads reflect two ERCW pumps in operation and after 48 hours from shutdown. Heat Exchanger UA values are a function of heat exchanger geometry and flow and are not dependent on heat duty on the device.
Using the lower two ERCW pump flow of 7,125 gpm would produce lower UA values than the use of the higher 9,200 MBtu/hr flow from three ERCW pumps. Note that the LOCA containment analysis must support both two and three ERCW pumps in-service.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted calculated based on the real CCS HX UA =           During discussions with NRC reviewers, a question was posed as to the conservatism 6.44 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F?                                   of using a mass flow based allotment of UA. A counter proposal was made that the allotment should be made based on the heat load from each unit.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 33 of 64
(c) Provide the analysis that shows that the calculated value of shutdown unit virtual HX CCS   The spreadsheets at the end of this enclosure provide a comparison between the two UA (based on UA = 3.17 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F for the CCS       methods, using 9,200 gpm total ERCW flow. These spreadsheets will be added to LOCA virtual HX and 6.44 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F for the real   Calculation EPMJN010890, Appendix E.
Item No.
CCS HX) can handle the shutdown cooling load of 89.4 MBtu/hr plus 0.53 MBtu/hr miscellaneous c. Response to a and b will address c. Results of a and b will also be provided.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted calculated based on the real CCS HX UA =
loads.
6.44 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F?
: b. Add data sheets reflecting virtual CCS HX performance based on CCS Flow and CCS (d) Table C7.7.69 states the RHR HX heat load for      heat load. Include sensitivity analysis based on ERCW flow based on heat load.
(c) Provide the analysis that shows that the calculated value of shutdown unit virtual HX CCS UA (based on UA = 3.17 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F for the CCS LOCA virtual HX and 6.44 MBtu/hr-&#xba;F for the real CCS HX) can handle the shutdown cooling load of 89.4 MBtu/hr plus 0.53 MBtu/hr miscellaneous loads.
the shutdown unit is 89.4 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load        Using the larger 9,200 gpm ERCW flow the real HX UA is 6.82 MBtu/hr-F. With the occur?                                              HX apportioned by Flow, the shutdown cooling HX UA is 3.35 (the same as the LOCA unit). With the HX apportioned by Heat Load, the shutdown cooling HX UA is (e) Table E1 states RHR HX heat load for shutdown      4.12 MBtu/hr-F. It is calculated the same as above for the LOCA unit.
(d) Table C7.7.69 states the RHR HX heat load for the shutdown unit is 89.4 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load occur?
unit s 56.7 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load occur?        c. This is demonstrated by Table C7.7.69 and is reproduced in the first table above for a total ERCW flow of 9,200 gpm. All ERCW and CCS temperatures are acceptable.
(e) Table E1 states RHR HX heat load for shutdown unit s 56.7 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load occur?
(f) Tables C7.7.69 and E1 states the RHR HX heat        Note: the miscellaneous heat load and flow gets its own virtual HX with UA load for the LOCA unit is 54.8 MBtu/hr.            apportioned by either Flow or Heat Load.
(f) Tables C7.7.69 and E1 states the RHR HX heat load for the LOCA unit is 54.8 MBtu/hr.
Please confirm this is the heat load at the      d. 7 - hours initiation of the RHR sprays assumed to start operating at 3600 second from the LOCA          e. 48 - hours initiation.
Please confirm this is the heat load at the initiation of the RHR sprays assumed to start operating at 3600 second from the LOCA initiation.
: f. In TVAs calculation, the 54.8 MBtu/hr is assumed from initiation of recirculation mode (g) At what time does the LOCA occur in relation to    (~40 minutes assuming the loss of train event).
(g) At what time does the LOCA occur in relation to the initiation of the shutdown transient assumed in Tables C7.7.69 and E1?
the initiation of the shutdown transient assumed in Tables C7.7.69 and E1?                        g. For GDC-5 analysis, the LOCA occurs 7-hours after the initiation of a shutdown on the non-accident unit.
(h) Tables C7.7.69 and E1, miscellaneous heat load 0.53 MBtu/hr is for which unit. Confirm whether this is a combined miscellaneous load for both units, and if so, how much is imposed on each During discussions with NRC reviewers, a question was posed as to the conservatism of using a mass flow based allotment of UA. A counter proposal was made that the allotment should be made based on the heat load from each unit.
(h) Tables C7.7.69 and E1, miscellaneous heat load 0.53 MBtu/hr is for which unit. Confirm whether  h. 0.53 MBtu/hr is the combined miscellaneous heat load for two units. The this is a combined miscellaneous load for both      miscellaneous loads are accounted for using an additional virtual heat exchanger.
The spreadsheets at the end of this enclosure provide a comparison between the two methods, using 9,200 gpm total ERCW flow. These spreadsheets will be added to Calculation EPMJN010890, Appendix E.
units, and if so, how much is imposed on each Page 33 of 64
: c. Response to a and b will address c. Results of a and b will also be provided.
: b. Add data sheets reflecting virtual CCS HX performance based on CCS Flow and CCS heat load. Include sensitivity analysis based on ERCW flow based on heat load.
Using the larger 9,200 gpm ERCW flow the real HX UA is 6.82 MBtu/hr-F. With the HX apportioned by Flow, the shutdown cooling HX UA is 3.35 (the same as the LOCA unit). With the HX apportioned by Heat Load, the shutdown cooling HX UA is 4.12 MBtu/hr-F. It is calculated the same as above for the LOCA unit.
: c. This is demonstrated by Table C7.7.69 and is reproduced in the first table above for a total ERCW flow of 9,200 gpm. All ERCW and CCS temperatures are acceptable.
Note: the miscellaneous heat load and flow gets its own virtual HX with UA apportioned by either Flow or Heat Load.
: d. 7 - hours
: e. 48 - hours
: f.
In TVAs calculation, the 54.8 MBtu/hr is assumed from initiation of recirculation mode
(~40 minutes assuming the loss of train event).
: g. For GDC-5 analysis, the LOCA occurs 7-hours after the initiation of a shutdown on the non-accident unit.
: h. 0.53 MBtu/hr is the combined miscellaneous heat load for two units. The miscellaneous loads are accounted for using an additional virtual heat exchanger.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted CCS virtual HX.                                   i. The limiting temperature is 146&deg;F CCS temperature at the outlet of the RHR HX (analyzed pipe stress limit). The Operating Modes calculation EPMJK022988 shows (i) What is the maximum operating temperature of           that CCS temperatures through the RHR HX should not exceed 146&#xba;F. The stress the CCS fluid under the condition of the most           calculation is N3-70-04A.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 34 of 64
limiting heat load on the RHR HX C?
Item No.
: j. See EPMJN010890, Section 7.1, Sheet 31 and 32.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted CCS virtual HX.
(j) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, explain the difference between the design and actual values   k. See EPMJN010890, Section 6.1 for ho and hi for the CCS and RHR HXs.
(i) What is the maximum operating temperature of the CCS fluid under the condition of the most limiting heat load on the RHR HX C?
: l. See EPMJN010890, Section 7.0.2, Equation 10 and Section 7.3, Sheets 41 and 42.
(j) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, explain the difference between the design and actual values for ho and hi for the CCS and RHR HXs.
(k) Refer to Section 6.1.4 and 6.1.5 of the calculation which states the HX tubes were changed from 90-10 copper nickel to stainless steel. Confirm that the CCS U and UA given in Tables C7.7.69 and E1 are based on the as-built HX material thermal conductivity, tube thickness, worst fouling resistance and tube plugging.
(k) Refer to Section 6.1.4 and 6.1.5 of the calculation which states the HX tubes were changed from 90-10 copper nickel to stainless steel. Confirm that the CCS U and UA given in Tables C7.7.69 and E1 are based on the as-built HX material thermal conductivity, tube thickness, worst fouling resistance and tube plugging.
(l) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, what is represented by F, R, and S and the HX correction factor r, and p?
(l) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, what is represented by F, R, and S and the HX correction factor r, and p?
BOP - 22                                                As documented in MDQ00006720080341 Appendices 11 (two ERCW Pumps) and 17 (three ERCW Pumps), MULTIFLOW demonstrates that the ERCW pumps develop In BOP-13-16, the licensee listed the design heat       sufficient head to supply all required users during loss of downstream dam conditions.
: i.
loads and corresponding required flow rates for CCS and ERCW during a DBA and loss of Train A or Train     Calculation EPM-WUC-072489 demonstrates that three ERCW pumps have required B. One of the design basis conditions is a loss of     NPSHA for loss of downstream dam conditions.
The limiting temperature is 146&deg;F CCS temperature at the outlet of the RHR HX (analyzed pipe stress limit). The Operating Modes calculation EPMJK022988 shows that CCS temperatures through the RHR HX should not exceed 146&#xba;F. The stress calculation is N3-70-04A.
24.
: j.
downstream dam.
See EPMJN010890, Section 7.1, Sheet 31 and 32.
: k. See EPMJN010890, Section 6.1
: l.
See EPMJN010890, Section 7.0.2, Equation 10 and Section 7.3, Sheets 41 and 42.
: 24.
BOP - 22 In BOP-13-16, the licensee listed the design heat loads and corresponding required flow rates for CCS and ERCW during a DBA and loss of Train A or Train B. One of the design basis conditions is a loss of downstream dam.
Describe and justify how the ERCW design accounts for a loss of downstream dam during a DBA with the equipment and system lineups that are specified in both LCOs of TS 3.7.8 and proposed TS 3.7.17.
Describe and justify how the ERCW design accounts for a loss of downstream dam during a DBA with the equipment and system lineups that are specified in both LCOs of TS 3.7.8 and proposed TS 3.7.17.
ELEC 3                                             Response Summary from TVA Letter to NRC dated August 3, 2015:
As documented in MDQ00006720080341 Appendices 11 (two ERCW Pumps) and 17 (three ERCW Pumps), MULTIFLOW demonstrates that the ERCW pumps develop sufficient head to supply all required users during loss of downstream dam conditions.
25.
Calculation EPM-WUC-072489 demonstrates that three ERCW pumps have required NPSHA for loss of downstream dam conditions.
As documented in NUREG-0847, "Safety Evaluation Page 34 of 64
: 25.
ELEC 3 As documented in NUREG-0847, "Safety Evaluation Response Summary from TVA Letter to NRC dated August 3, 2015:  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted Report Related to the Operation of Watts Bar Nuclear     Q1 Plant, Unit 2," Supplement 22, (SSER 22) published       With offsite power available, there is no change to the licensing basis documented in February 2011, the licensing basis of Watts Bar          SSER 22. Changes to the cases in the calculations for the dual unit shutdown with offsite Nuclear Units is:                                        power available were not revised in association with the June 17, 2015 LAR.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 35 of 64
: 1. Dual-unit trip as a result of an abnormal            The SI pump, Containment Spray pump, and AFW pump combined horsepower is operational occurrence                              approximately 1660 horsepower. This is approximately twice the horsepower requirement
Item No.
: 2. Accident in one unit and concurrent shutdown of      of an ERCW pump. Since these three pumps are not running for the GDC-5 case, there is the second unit (with and without offsite power)    considerable margin compared to the limiting case thus demonstrating that the start of a
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Report Related to the Operation of Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 2," Supplement 22, (SSER 22) published February 2011, the licensing basis of Watts Bar Nuclear Units is:
: 3. Accident in one unit and spurious engineered          second ERCW pump on a non-accident shutdown board is acceptable and bounded by safety feature actuation in the other unit (with and the LOCA/inadvertent SI case.
: 1. Dual-unit trip as a result of an abnormal operational occurrence
without offsite power)
: 2. Accident in one unit and concurrent shutdown of the second unit (with and without offsite power)
The evaluations of CSSTs A and B are included in WBN calculation The license amendment request (LAR) for Watts Bar        EDQ00099920070002, AC Auxiliary Power System Analysis. TVA submitted a response Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1, dated June 17, 2015          to NRC Open Items from SSER 22 on April 6, 2011 for WBN Unit 2. This submittal (Agencywide Documents Access and Management              described the margin studies done for all four CSSTs. The margin studies that TVA System (ADAMS) Accession No. ML15170A474)                provided in the submittal were discussed in SSER 24 in relation to the closure of SSER proposes realignment of Component Cooling System        Open Items 27 and 28. Because the LOCA on one unit with an inadvertent SI on the other pumps and Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW)            unit results in a higher load than the scenario discussed in the LAR, additional margin Pumps to support heat removal capability.                studies were not required.
: 3. Accident in one unit and spurious engineered safety feature actuation in the other unit (with and without offsite power)
The staff is also reviewing a LAR submitted by letter    Q2 dated August 1, 2013 (ADAMS Accession No.                The DG loading for the first 20 minutes is the base case loading described in the WBN ML13220A103), to modify limiting conditions for          Calculation EDQ00099920080014, Diesel Generator Loading Analysis. The CCS pumps operation for Technical Specification 3.8.1, AC        are assumed to start and run in the base case, so the proposed amendment related to Sources - Operating, for the available maintenance      CCS does not represent a change from an electrical standpoint. The loading of a second feeder for Common Station Service Transformers          ERCW pump on an individual DG occurs no earlier than 40 minutes after DG start. This is (CSSTs) A and B.                                        why the base case applies for the first 20 minutes.
The license amendment request (LAR) for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1, dated June 17, 2015 (Agencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) Accession No. ML15170A474) proposes realignment of Component Cooling System pumps and Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW)
The staff is requesting clarification on loading of      Table 3 of the June 17, 2015 submittal represents the bounding cases after 20 minutes.
Pumps to support heat removal capability.
onsite and offsite power systems and has determined      The values in the table provide the horsepower assumed for each of the large motor loads that the following additional information is needed to  for each available DG and provide the total kW loading on each available DG for the complete the review of the LAR:                          scenarios in Table 3. Attachment 1 of that letter provided excerpts from the DG loading calculation including tables that summarized the loads on each DG for a variety of cases
The staff is also reviewing a LAR submitted by {{letter dated|date=August 1, 2013|text=letter dated August 1, 2013}} (ADAMS Accession No. ML13220A103), to modify limiting conditions for operation for Technical Specification 3.8.1, AC Sources - Operating, for the available maintenance feeder for Common Station Service Transformers (CSSTs) A and B.
: 1. For the scenarios related to dual unit shutdown      including Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) / LOCA and dual unit cases.
The staff is requesting clarification on loading of onsite and offsite power systems and has determined that the following additional information is needed to complete the review of the LAR:
with offsite power system available, please Page 35 of 64
: 1. For the scenarios related to dual unit shutdown with offsite power system available, please Q1 With offsite power available, there is no change to the licensing basis documented in SSER 22. Changes to the cases in the calculations for the dual unit shutdown with offsite power available were not revised in association with the June 17, 2015 LAR.
The SI pump, Containment Spray pump, and AFW pump combined horsepower is approximately 1660 horsepower. This is approximately twice the horsepower requirement of an ERCW pump. Since these three pumps are not running for the GDC-5 case, there is considerable margin compared to the limiting case thus demonstrating that the start of a second ERCW pump on a non-accident shutdown board is acceptable and bounded by the LOCA/inadvertent SI case.
The evaluations of CSSTs A and B are included in WBN calculation EDQ00099920070002, AC Auxiliary Power System Analysis. TVA submitted a response to NRC Open Items from SSER 22 on April 6, 2011 for WBN Unit 2. This submittal described the margin studies done for all four CSSTs. The margin studies that TVA provided in the submittal were discussed in SSER 24 in relation to the closure of SSER Open Items 27 and 28. Because the LOCA on one unit with an inadvertent SI on the other unit results in a higher load than the scenario discussed in the LAR, additional margin studies were not required.
Q2 The DG loading for the first 20 minutes is the base case loading described in the WBN Calculation EDQ00099920080014, Diesel Generator Loading Analysis. The CCS pumps are assumed to start and run in the base case, so the proposed amendment related to CCS does not represent a change from an electrical standpoint. The loading of a second ERCW pump on an individual DG occurs no earlier than 40 minutes after DG start. This is why the base case applies for the first 20 minutes.
Table 3 of the June 17, 2015 submittal represents the bounding cases after 20 minutes.
The values in the table provide the horsepower assumed for each of the large motor loads for each available DG and provide the total kW loading on each available DG for the scenarios in Table 3. Attachment 1 of that letter provided excerpts from the DG loading calculation including tables that summarized the loads on each DG for a variety of cases including Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) / LOCA and dual unit cases.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted provide a summary of the calculations performed   Q3 to evaluate capability of offsite power           Before a second ERCW pump can be loaded on its DG, the AFW Pump, if running, will be transformers CSST A and B for the licensing       stopped and the main control room hand switch placed in pull-to-lock. This action assures basis documented in SSER 22. Provide the           that the AFW pump will not inadvertently start to preclude overloading the DG. TVA impact of changes proposed in the June 17, 2015,   currently plans to include these actions in the same procedure that starts the second LAR on the licensing basis documented in SSER     ERCW pump. The actions will be placed in a step that precedes the start of the second
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 36 of 64
: 22.                                                ERCW pump. This is the only load shed assumed in the DG loading analysis.
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted provide a summary of the calculations performed to evaluate capability of offsite power transformers CSST A and B for the licensing basis documented in SSER 22. Provide the impact of changes proposed in the June 17, 2015, LAR on the licensing basis documented in SSER
: 22.
: 2. Table 3 in Enclosure 1 of the WBN Unit 1, LAR dated June 17, 2015, contains the Summary of Steady-State Diesel Generator (DG) Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (>20 minutes) only.
: 2. Table 3 in Enclosure 1 of the WBN Unit 1, LAR dated June 17, 2015, contains the Summary of Steady-State Diesel Generator (DG) Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (>20 minutes) only.
Please clarify whether the electrical system loadings considered in Table 3 of the LAR is bounding for all the scenarios without offsite power addressed in SSER 22 summarized above. For the scenarios related to shutdown using onsite power systems, please provide details (calculations or explanation) related to large motor loads (Rating and horse power value) considered for the specific scenarios. Provide details of additional kilo-Watt (kW) loading considered in the total kW loading of each DG. Also provide DG loadings during 20 minutes.
Please clarify whether the electrical system loadings considered in Table 3 of the LAR is bounding for all the scenarios without offsite power addressed in SSER 22 summarized above. For the scenarios related to shutdown using onsite power systems, please provide details (calculations or explanation) related to large motor loads (Rating and horse power value) considered for the specific scenarios. Provide details of additional kilo-Watt (kW) loading considered in the total kW loading of each DG. Also provide DG loadings during 20 minutes.
: 3. Please provide details on any load shedding that may be procedurally controlled to preclude overloading the power source(s).
: 3. Please provide details on any load shedding that may be procedurally controlled to preclude overloading the power source(s).
Date Posted: 07/31/15 ELEC - 4                                               A revision to the DG loading calculation has been completed. Discrepancies between the revised calculation and Enclosure 1, Table 3 of the June 17, 2015 letter have been Resolve the apparent discrepancy between the DG        resolved. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on
Date Posted: 07/31/15 Q3 Before a second ERCW pump can be loaded on its DG, the AFW Pump, if running, will be stopped and the main control room hand switch placed in pull-to-lock. This action assures that the AFW pump will not inadvertently start to preclude overloading the DG. TVA currently plans to include these actions in the same procedure that starts the second ERCW pump. The actions will be placed in a step that precedes the start of the second ERCW pump. This is the only load shed assumed in the DG loading analysis.
: 26. loading calculation, Appendix N for AFW load on        Sharepoint. An updated version of Enclosure 1, Table 3 is included at the end of this LOCA unit and the June 17, 2015 Enclosure 1, Table      enclosure.
: 26.
3 AFW load indicated on the LOCA unit (i.e., 600 hp versus 300 hp).
ELEC - 4 Resolve the apparent discrepancy between the DG loading calculation, Appendix N for AFW load on LOCA unit and the June 17, 2015 Enclosure 1, Table 3 AFW load indicated on the LOCA unit (i.e., 600 hp versus 300 hp).
Page 36 of 64
A revision to the DG loading calculation has been completed. Discrepancies between the revised calculation and Enclosure 1, Table 3 of the {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=June 17, 2015 letter}} have been resolved. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on Sharepoint. An updated version of Enclosure 1, Table 3 is included at the end of this enclosure.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted Also update Enclosure 1, Table 3 to reflect other corrections made to DG loading Calculation.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 37 of 64
ELEC - 5                                                 A revision to the DG loading calculation is in progress with an outcome that is expected to be favorable. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on Evaluate the differences in DG loading for a small      Sharepoint.
Item No.
: 27. break LOCA. Is the large break LOCA assumed in the GDC 5 analysis bounding?
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Also update Enclosure 1, Table 3 to reflect other corrections made to DG loading Calculation.
HF - 1                                                  The first cue provided to the operating staff is a procedural step in E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant to check the status of electrical power. Should a complete loss of Describe what cues will be provided to the operator    either train of 6.9 kilovolt (kV) shutdown board be detected in this step, the procedure will indicating that new and changed manual actions (as      require that additional actions be taken.
: 27.
described in TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 5, Item 1) are required. In your        The first action will be to determine if the remaining train of power is supplied from offsite response, identify the specific plant condition,        or DG source. If the offsite power source is supplying the bus, the operator is directed to annunciator status, associated alarms, and              start an additional ERCW pump associated with the shutdown units 6.9 kV shutdown procedure steps that will provide instructions to the    board that remains powered. Depending on the train of power lost, the operations staff operator. Further, identify information that is required may be required to start an additional CCS pump.
ELEC - 5 Evaluate the differences in DG loading for a small break LOCA. Is the large break LOCA assumed in the GDC 5 analysis bounding?
to inform the operator that these manual actions have been correctly performed, and that they can be          Should the source of power remaining be the DGs, the operator is directed to perform terminated.                                              actions in accordance with an appendix to the E-1 procedure. This appendix is handed off 28.
A revision to the DG loading calculation is in progress with an outcome that is expected to be favorable. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on Sharepoint.
to the shutdown unit.
: 28.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 The shutdown unit will first determine if RHR cooling is in service. If RHR cooling is NOT in service, the shutdown unit is directed to secure plant cooldown and maintain current plant temperature. An additional action is specified to perform throttling of ERCW cooling flow through the CCS heat exchanger (HX), if required due to the specific loss of power.
HF - 1 Describe what cues will be provided to the operator indicating that new and changed manual actions (as described in TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 5, Item 1) are required. In your response, identify the specific plant condition, annunciator status, associated alarms, and procedure steps that will provide instructions to the operator. Further, identify information that is required to inform the operator that these manual actions have been correctly performed, and that they can be terminated.
If RHR cooling is in service, actions are contained in the Appendix to: place the motor driven AFW (MDAFW) pump hand switch in pull-to-lock (PTL) if the turbine driven AFW (TDAFW) pump is in operation, dispatch an operator to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the ERCW bypass switch in the bypass condition and start the ERCW pump when 20 minutes have elapsed.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 The first cue provided to the operating staff is a procedural step in E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant to check the status of electrical power. Should a complete loss of either train of 6.9 kilovolt (kV) shutdown board be detected in this step, the procedure will require that additional actions be taken.
Page 37 of 64
The first action will be to determine if the remaining train of power is supplied from offsite or DG source. If the offsite power source is supplying the bus, the operator is directed to start an additional ERCW pump associated with the shutdown units 6.9 kV shutdown board that remains powered. Depending on the train of power lost, the operations staff may be required to start an additional CCS pump.
Should the source of power remaining be the DGs, the operator is directed to perform actions in accordance with an appendix to the E-1 procedure. This appendix is handed off to the shutdown unit.
The shutdown unit will first determine if RHR cooling is in service. If RHR cooling is NOT in service, the shutdown unit is directed to secure plant cooldown and maintain current plant temperature. An additional action is specified to perform throttling of ERCW cooling flow through the CCS heat exchanger (HX), if required due to the specific loss of power.
If RHR cooling is in service, actions are contained in the Appendix to: place the motor driven AFW (MDAFW) pump hand switch in pull-to-lock (PTL) if the turbine driven AFW (TDAFW) pump is in operation, dispatch an operator to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the ERCW bypass switch in the bypass condition and start the ERCW pump when 20 minutes have elapsed.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted The main control room (MCR) will be alerted that the bypass switch has been placed in bypass by a MCR annunciator that alarms when the switch is placed in bypass. Should the field operator position the wrong switch, the MCR staff would become aware of this fact upon attempting to start the ERCW pump. The expected indications, breaker position lights, pump amps, discharge pressure and flow, would not be observed. This would cue the MCR staff to request that the field operator verify the correct switch had been operated.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 38 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The main control room (MCR) will be alerted that the bypass switch has been placed in bypass by a MCR annunciator that alarms when the switch is placed in bypass. Should the field operator position the wrong switch, the MCR staff would become aware of this fact upon attempting to start the ERCW pump. The expected indications, breaker position lights, pump amps, discharge pressure and flow, would not be observed. This would cue the MCR staff to request that the field operator verify the correct switch had been operated.
An additional cue is provided in a note contained in the main body procedure response of E-1 that the additional ERCW pump must be placed in service prior to aligning containment sump recirculation on the accident unit.
An additional cue is provided in a note contained in the main body procedure response of E-1 that the additional ERCW pump must be placed in service prior to aligning containment sump recirculation on the accident unit.
Once the additional alignments are put in place by E-1, they will remain in place until a determination is made by the Emergency Response Organization (ERO) that conditions no longer require their operation. In this event, the Technical Support Center (TSC) will be staffed and the Shift Manager (SM) will transfer Site Emergency Director duties to the TSC. Since the continued need of the additional alignments will vary depending on the specific conditions at the start of the event, no attempt was made to proceduralize securing the alignments. The SM will consult with the TSC to determine that plant conditions are such that the alignments are no longer required.
Once the additional alignments are put in place by E-1, they will remain in place until a determination is made by the Emergency Response Organization (ERO) that conditions no longer require their operation. In this event, the Technical Support Center (TSC) will be staffed and the Shift Manager (SM) will transfer Site Emergency Director duties to the TSC. Since the continued need of the additional alignments will vary depending on the specific conditions at the start of the event, no attempt was made to proceduralize securing the alignments. The SM will consult with the TSC to determine that plant conditions are such that the alignments are no longer required.
HF - 2                                                   In this case, the accident unit will be considered to be in the lead during the event since the emergency operating procedure (EOP) for the accident unit is the driver for actions Describe how the operators of each of two units will    required. Upon EOP entry, the accident units Unit Supervisor (US) will perform a crew be informed of the status of the other unit, and how    update. Although this update is primarily intended to focus the attention of the particular their actions will be coordinated. Clarify if one of the units crew, the common design of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) MCR allows either two units will be put in lead, and what events will      units operating staff to hear a crew update performed on either unit. In addition, the many result in changes to the chain of command.              alarms that are received during a LOCA will be immediately noticed by the shutdown unit,
: 29.
: 29.                                                          so there is no potential that the shutdown unit will not realize that conditions have Date Posted: 07/31/15                                    degraded on the accident unit.
HF - 2 Describe how the operators of each of two units will be informed of the status of the other unit, and how their actions will be coordinated. Clarify if one of the two units will be put in lead, and what events will result in changes to the chain of command.
Upon EOP entry, the standard practice at WBN is to recall the Shift Technical Advisor (STA) and the SM to the MCR, if they are not currently present. This is practiced routinely during operator requalification training by removing all persons from the simulator except for the minimum staffing requirements. A condition is then inserted on the simulator, and the operators remaining in the MCR are required to recall the rest of the staff to the Page 38 of 64
Date Posted: 07/31/15 In this case, the accident unit will be considered to be in the lead during the event since the emergency operating procedure (EOP) for the accident unit is the driver for actions required. Upon EOP entry, the accident units Unit Supervisor (US) will perform a crew update. Although this update is primarily intended to focus the attention of the particular units crew, the common design of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) MCR allows either units operating staff to hear a crew update performed on either unit. In addition, the many alarms that are received during a LOCA will be immediately noticed by the shutdown unit, so there is no potential that the shutdown unit will not realize that conditions have degraded on the accident unit.
Upon EOP entry, the standard practice at WBN is to recall the Shift Technical Advisor (STA) and the SM to the MCR, if they are not currently present. This is practiced routinely during operator requalification training by removing all persons from the simulator except for the minimum staffing requirements. A condition is then inserted on the simulator, and the operators remaining in the MCR are required to recall the rest of the staff to the  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted simulator to combat the casualty.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 39 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted simulator to combat the casualty.
The standard chain of command will remain in effect during this event. The SM retains overall oversight and will have overall responsibility for ensuring dual unit activities are adequately prioritized and supported. The STA provides additional oversight and backup that the accident crew is taking appropriate actions based on the plant conditions at the accident unit. The accident unit US directs the crews response in the EOP. The shutdown unit US directs the procedural activities required for shutdown.
The standard chain of command will remain in effect during this event. The SM retains overall oversight and will have overall responsibility for ensuring dual unit activities are adequately prioritized and supported. The STA provides additional oversight and backup that the accident crew is taking appropriate actions based on the plant conditions at the accident unit. The accident unit US directs the crews response in the EOP. The shutdown unit US directs the procedural activities required for shutdown.
The accident unit operating staff will conduct the electrical power monitoring activities directed in procedure E-1. When a complete loss of one train of power is detected, the US will direct the appropriate mitigating steps based on the existing conditions. The duties required of the shutdown unit will be directed by handing off the attachment of E-1 that contains the necessary actions.
The accident unit operating staff will conduct the electrical power monitoring activities directed in procedure E-1. When a complete loss of one train of power is detected, the US will direct the appropriate mitigating steps based on the existing conditions. The duties required of the shutdown unit will be directed by handing off the attachment of E-1 that contains the necessary actions.
In this event, the communication between the units will be provided via US communication or the SM. The nature of this event is that a large number of alarms will occur, so the fact that something unusual has happened to the accident unit will be readily apparent to the shutdown unit. It is predictable that the annunciators, coupled with the observed level of activity on the accident unit, will prompt one of the shutdown units operators to be dispatched to gather information on what is happening on the accident unit. It would also be the expectation that if the shutdown units condition allows, one of the Unit Operators (UOs) from the shutdown unit would function to support mitigating activities on the accident unit.
In this event, the communication between the units will be provided via US communication or the SM. The nature of this event is that a large number of alarms will occur, so the fact that something unusual has happened to the accident unit will be readily apparent to the shutdown unit. It is predictable that the annunciators, coupled with the observed level of activity on the accident unit, will prompt one of the shutdown units operators to be dispatched to gather information on what is happening on the accident unit. It would also be the expectation that if the shutdown units condition allows, one of the Unit Operators (UOs) from the shutdown unit would function to support mitigating activities on the accident unit.
HF - 3                                               The Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) Operating Experience (OE) database and the TVA OE database were searched for industry events associated with ERCW, Describe if TVA identified any relevant, pre-existing CCS and dual unit operations. The list obtained from these searches was reviewed to performance issues associated with procedural        determine lessons that might need to be incorporated in the development of this design guidance, training, and operator manual actions      change. In addition, WBN benchmarked both Sequoyah and Browns Ferry for lessons
: 30.
: 30. related to starting and stopping ERCW and CCW        learned on dual unit operations. This benchmarking ultimately resulted in the generic pumps and operating switches on the 6.9 kV            post-accident response that was developed in coordinating the WBN actions for this shutdown board or issues associated with dual unit    postulated event.
HF - 3 Describe if TVA identified any relevant, pre-existing performance issues associated with procedural guidance, training, and operator manual actions related to starting and stopping ERCW and CCW pumps and operating switches on the 6.9 kV shutdown board or issues associated with dual unit operation at other sites.
operation at other sites.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 The Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) Operating Experience (OE) database and the TVA OE database were searched for industry events associated with ERCW, CCS and dual unit operations. The list obtained from these searches was reviewed to determine lessons that might need to be incorporated in the development of this design change. In addition, WBN benchmarked both Sequoyah and Browns Ferry for lessons learned on dual unit operations. This benchmarking ultimately resulted in the generic post-accident response that was developed in coordinating the WBN actions for this postulated event.
The most common identified OE associated with dual unit operation of equipment involved Date Posted: 07/31/15                                plant transients due to operation of the wrong unit component. In this case, the changes Page 39 of 64
The most common identified OE associated with dual unit operation of equipment involved plant transients due to operation of the wrong unit component. In this case, the changes  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted at WBN do not fit this common error mode, in that the ERCW is common unit equipment, so that there is no potential for operating the correct component on the wrong unit. The method chosen for alignment of the second train B CCS pump (normally from the shutdown unit and operated by the shutdown units staff) also provides protection from wrong unit equipment concerns. The CCS pump will only be started on a LOCA accompanied with a loss of train of electrical power. In this case, the B train CCS pump for the accident unit will automatically start, so the chances that the operating unit staff will attempt to manipulate this component are nonexistent.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 40 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted at WBN do not fit this common error mode, in that the ERCW is common unit equipment, so that there is no potential for operating the correct component on the wrong unit. The method chosen for alignment of the second train B CCS pump (normally from the shutdown unit and operated by the shutdown units staff) also provides protection from wrong unit equipment concerns. The CCS pump will only be started on a LOCA accompanied with a loss of train of electrical power. In this case, the B train CCS pump for the accident unit will automatically start, so the chances that the operating unit staff will attempt to manipulate this component are nonexistent.
Another common identified OE involved misoperation of the expected component. This condition is precluded by the WBN design in that the MCR staff will be alerted that the interlock bypass switch has been placed in the correct position by MCR annunciation.
Another common identified OE involved misoperation of the expected component. This condition is precluded by the WBN design in that the MCR staff will be alerted that the interlock bypass switch has been placed in the correct position by MCR annunciation.
HF - 4                                               During development of this design change, operations, training and engineering personnel worked to determine the final product that would be installed in the plant. Operations is a Describe any changes that were required of the        quorum member of all Design Change Notice (DCN) meetings in order to ensure that Control Room task analysis that was done as part of  operations provides input into all design changes implemented in the plant.
: 31.
TVAs Detailed Control Room Design Review. If no update to the task analysis was necessary, describe  No new switches or components were added in the MCR for this issue. Components how task requirements were developed for the          operated in the MCR are: 1 CCS pump, 1 ERCW pump, 1 AFW handswitch and ERCW identified new and changed operator actions.          flow control valves (FCVs) for CCS HX. These components are already routinely Describe what reasonable or credible potential errors operated by the MCR staff for multiple normal alignments and casualty situations.
HF - 4 Describe any changes that were required of the Control Room task analysis that was done as part of TVAs Detailed Control Room Design Review. If no update to the task analysis was necessary, describe how task requirements were developed for the identified new and changed operator actions.
associated with the new and changed operator actions were identified during task analysis.        A new annunciator designed consistent with current design requirements, MCR
Describe what reasonable or credible potential errors associated with the new and changed operator actions were identified during task analysis.
: 31.                                                      standards, and NUREG-0700 requirements has been added to the MCR. The WBN Date Posted: 07/31/15                                Annunciator Response Instructions contain the response to this annunciator, consistent with the method contained in the existing annunciator response guidance.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 During development of this design change, operations, training and engineering personnel worked to determine the final product that would be installed in the plant. Operations is a quorum member of all Design Change Notice (DCN) meetings in order to ensure that operations provides input into all design changes implemented in the plant.
An additional bypass switch has been added to the 6.9 kV shutdown boards to allow starting the third ERCW pump if DG power is all that is available. If required, a Nuclear Assistant Unit Operator (NAUO) will be dispatched to the area to operate the switch. The switch itself is new, but the task of aligning electrical board transfer switches is one that is routinely performed by the NAUOs. The new switches most closely resemble the Appendix R transfer switches that are located on multiple electrical components that are currently operated by NAUOs when required.
No new switches or components were added in the MCR for this issue. Components operated in the MCR are: 1 CCS pump, 1 ERCW pump, 1 AFW handswitch and ERCW flow control valves (FCVs) for CCS HX. These components are already routinely operated by the MCR staff for multiple normal alignments and casualty situations.
Page 40 of 64
A new annunciator designed consistent with current design requirements, MCR standards, and NUREG-0700 requirements has been added to the MCR. The WBN Annunciator Response Instructions contain the response to this annunciator, consistent with the method contained in the existing annunciator response guidance.
An additional bypass switch has been added to the 6.9 kV shutdown boards to allow starting the third ERCW pump if DG power is all that is available. If required, a Nuclear Assistant Unit Operator (NAUO) will be dispatched to the area to operate the switch. The switch itself is new, but the task of aligning electrical board transfer switches is one that is routinely performed by the NAUOs. The new switches most closely resemble the Appendix R transfer switches that are located on multiple electrical components that are currently operated by NAUOs when required.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted The interlock bypass switches are labeled consistent with other plant equipment as required by TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. The positions of the switch are clearly discernable. Attached to this response are several pictures of the new switches to convey location and labeling that is installed in the plant.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 41 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The interlock bypass switches are labeled consistent with other plant equipment as required by TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. The positions of the switch are clearly discernable. Attached to this response are several pictures of the new switches to convey location and labeling that is installed in the plant.
When installed, the switches for each electrical board will be checked and independently verified to be in the correct position at least once per month. The switches will be added to the DG standby checklist which is performed after each monthly DG surveillance or for any evolution that has removed the DG from service. This will require 8 NAUOs to view the switches and their positions locally each month. This frequent check, coupled with standard labeling and similarity of this task to those already performed by the NAUOs, gives the station great confidence that switch operation can be successfully performed by the NAUOs.
When installed, the switches for each electrical board will be checked and independently verified to be in the correct position at least once per month. The switches will be added to the DG standby checklist which is performed after each monthly DG surveillance or for any evolution that has removed the DG from service. This will require 8 NAUOs to view the switches and their positions locally each month. This frequent check, coupled with standard labeling and similarity of this task to those already performed by the NAUOs, gives the station great confidence that switch operation can be successfully performed by the NAUOs.
HF - 5                                               The increase in workload due to this license amendment is considered well within the existing capabilities of the current required minimum staffing complement. The actions Describe any increase in operator workload that will added are: monitoring status of electrical power and taking the appropriate actions to start occur with the proposed license amendment            an ERCW/CCS pump.
: 32.
Date Posted: 07/31/15                                If offsite power is supplied to the remaining electrical power train, additional actions are limited to starting the ERCW pump, and potentially the B train CCS pump. An additional potential action is throttling CCS HX flows if required. These activities can be performed by one individual in a 1 to 2 minute timeframe.
HF - 5 Describe any increase in operator workload that will occur with the proposed license amendment Date Posted: 07/31/15 The increase in workload due to this license amendment is considered well within the existing capabilities of the current required minimum staffing complement. The actions added are: monitoring status of electrical power and taking the appropriate actions to start an ERCW/CCS pump.
: 32.                                                      If DG power is the only source to the remaining electrical train, actions in addition to the ones above are required. These actions will have minimum impact on the accident unit operating staff as the Attachment directing these actions will be handed off to the shutdown unit to complete. The actions of the attachment to prepare to start an additional ERCW pump will require dispatching an NAUO to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the bypass switch in the bypass position. The switch positioning and access to the board room area will require approximately 3 minutes and 35 seconds as outlined in the previously submitted dose assessment. The shutdown unit will then start an additional ERCW pump after 40 minutes has elapsed.
If offsite power is supplied to the remaining electrical power train, additional actions are limited to starting the ERCW pump, and potentially the B train CCS pump. An additional potential action is throttling CCS HX flows if required. These activities can be performed by one individual in a 1 to 2 minute timeframe.
Page 41 of 64
If DG power is the only source to the remaining electrical train, actions in addition to the ones above are required. These actions will have minimum impact on the accident unit operating staff as the Attachment directing these actions will be handed off to the shutdown unit to complete. The actions of the attachment to prepare to start an additional ERCW pump will require dispatching an NAUO to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the bypass switch in the bypass position. The switch positioning and access to the board room area will require approximately 3 minutes and 35 seconds as outlined in the previously submitted dose assessment. The shutdown unit will then start an additional ERCW pump after 40 minutes has elapsed.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                         Date Posted HF - 6                                                 NPG-SPP-09.3, Plant Modifications and Engineering Change Control, outlines the process in which the bypass switches were designed and installed. In this particular Describe the process used to design the ERCW          instance, DCN 53785 is being utilized to install the ERCW pump interlock bypass pump interlock bypass switch. In your response,        switches.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 42 of 64
explain if the switch complies with control room standards and the applicable guidance of NUREG-        The bypass switches are not augmented with status lights. As shown on the pictures at 0700, Human-System Interface Design Review            the end of this enclosure, the positions of bypass and normal are clearly labeled. When Guidelines. Further, describe how the bypassed and    the switch is taken to bypass, an alarm is received in the MCR. Thus, when the MCR non-bypassed states are labeled, and whether they      operators dispatch the NAUO to position this switch, the alarm that is received will inform are augmented with status lights showing actual        them that the action is complete prior to the communication from the NAUO. Should the valve position                                        NAUO fail to position the switch correctly, the lack of alarm will provide the MCR staff with opportunity to identify the error. Should the NAUO position the wrong switch, the ERCW 33.
Item No.
Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  pump will fail to start which will alert the operators that verification is needed to ensure that previous actions were performed correctly.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
: 33.
HF - 6 Describe the process used to design the ERCW pump interlock bypass switch. In your response, explain if the switch complies with control room standards and the applicable guidance of NUREG-0700, Human-System Interface Design Review Guidelines. Further, describe how the bypassed and non-bypassed states are labeled, and whether they are augmented with status lights showing actual valve position Date Posted: 07/31/15 NPG-SPP-09.3, Plant Modifications and Engineering Change Control, outlines the process in which the bypass switches were designed and installed. In this particular instance, DCN 53785 is being utilized to install the ERCW pump interlock bypass switches.
The bypass switches are not augmented with status lights. As shown on the pictures at the end of this enclosure, the positions of bypass and normal are clearly labeled. When the switch is taken to bypass, an alarm is received in the MCR. Thus, when the MCR operators dispatch the NAUO to position this switch, the alarm that is received will inform them that the action is complete prior to the communication from the NAUO. Should the NAUO fail to position the switch correctly, the lack of alarm will provide the MCR staff with opportunity to identify the error. Should the NAUO position the wrong switch, the ERCW pump will fail to start which will alert the operators that verification is needed to ensure that previous actions were performed correctly.
The switches conform to the requirements for local workstation controls outlined in NUREG-0700. Labeling of the switches is in accordance with labeling requirements of TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. This labeling is consistent with other components that the operating staff manipulates during routine evolutions. Standard abbreviations are used on the switch, are easily recognizable to the station staff and are defined in 0-TI-12.13, Acronyms/Abbreviations Listing for Labeling. The positions required to be selected are clearly marked and align with the instruction that is outlined in procedures. A picture of the switch and labeling provided at the end of this enclosure.
The switches conform to the requirements for local workstation controls outlined in NUREG-0700. Labeling of the switches is in accordance with labeling requirements of TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. This labeling is consistent with other components that the operating staff manipulates during routine evolutions. Standard abbreviations are used on the switch, are easily recognizable to the station staff and are defined in 0-TI-12.13, Acronyms/Abbreviations Listing for Labeling. The positions required to be selected are clearly marked and align with the instruction that is outlined in procedures. A picture of the switch and labeling provided at the end of this enclosure.
HF - 7                                                 The information contained in this response supersedes the information originally provided to the NRC concerning the procedures that will be developed for this event. TVAs initial TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review                response indicated that E-0 and ES-1.3 would contain the guidance that would be Question 5, Item 2, paragraph b states, in part: The  implemented post LOCA. After initial drafts were reviewed, it was determined that this final decision about what procedures will be affected  guidance more appropriately belonged in the EOP associated with a LOCA (E-1).
: 34.
by this license amendment request is part of the 34.
HF - 7 TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 5, Item 2, paragraph b states, in part: The final decision about what procedures will be affected by this license amendment request is part of the impact review that occurs once the submittal is approved.
impact review that occurs once the submittal is        A list of procedures that will ultimately be modified based on the changes needed to approved.                                            implement the requirements is included near the end of this enclosure. The previous TVA statement regarding the final decision about what procedures will be affected by this NUREG-1764, Guidance for the Review of Changes        license amendment request is part of the impact review that occurs once the submittal is to Human Actions, Revision 1, Section 3.8,            approved requires clarification. The procedures will not actually be implemented until the Procedure Design, states, in part: The objective of license amendment request (LAR) process is complete. However, part of the LAR Page 42 of 64
NUREG-1764, Guidance for the Review of Changes to Human Actions, Revision 1, Section 3.8, Procedure Design, states, in part: The objective of The information contained in this response supersedes the information originally provided to the NRC concerning the procedures that will be developed for this event. TVAs initial response indicated that E-0 and ES-1.3 would contain the guidance that would be implemented post LOCA. After initial drafts were reviewed, it was determined that this guidance more appropriately belonged in the EOP associated with a LOCA (E-1).
A list of procedures that will ultimately be modified based on the changes needed to implement the requirements is included near the end of this enclosure. The previous TVA statement regarding the final decision about what procedures will be affected by this license amendment request is part of the impact review that occurs once the submittal is approved requires clarification. The procedures will not actually be implemented until the license amendment request (LAR) process is complete. However, part of the LAR  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted this review is to verify that applicable plant         process and the accompanying DCN process require that impacts be identified in advance procedures have been appropriately modified, where    of the LAR or DCN. Therefore, at this time, TVA has a good understanding of the scope needed, to provide adequate guidance for the          of the procedure revisions required. Drafts of the proposed changes have been successful completion of the [Human Actions] HAs,      distributed for review to the appropriate personnel.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 43 of 64
and that the procedures adequately reflect changes in plant equipment and HAs.                          The only procedure that has been changed at this time is 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B System Operating Instruction. Revision 005 of this instruction was issued to Identify any new, revised, or deleted procedures      ensure that the bypass switch on the 6.9 kV shutdown board is checked during the required to support the proposed LAR not previously    performance of the DG standby checklist. This change has been field verified to ensure identified in docketed submittals. Provide procedure  the guidance in the procedure is consistent with the equipment information in the field.
Item No.
number, revision, title, and a summary of the actions changed, added, or deleted.                            The remaining procedures needed to implement this change will be issued as the implementing process requires. For the bypass switches, this will occur on return to Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  operation of the DCN paperwork following the work to install the switches. For the remainder, it will follow LAR approval.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted this review is to verify that applicable plant procedures have been appropriately modified, where needed, to provide adequate guidance for the successful completion of the [Human Actions] HAs, and that the procedures adequately reflect changes in plant equipment and HAs.
Identify any new, revised, or deleted procedures required to support the proposed LAR not previously identified in docketed submittals. Provide procedure number, revision, title, and a summary of the actions changed, added, or deleted.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 process and the accompanying DCN process require that impacts be identified in advance of the LAR or DCN. Therefore, at this time, TVA has a good understanding of the scope of the procedure revisions required. Drafts of the proposed changes have been distributed for review to the appropriate personnel.
The only procedure that has been changed at this time is 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B System Operating Instruction. Revision 005 of this instruction was issued to ensure that the bypass switch on the 6.9 kV shutdown board is checked during the performance of the DG standby checklist. This change has been field verified to ensure the guidance in the procedure is consistent with the equipment information in the field.
The remaining procedures needed to implement this change will be issued as the implementing process requires. For the bypass switches, this will occur on return to operation of the DCN paperwork following the work to install the switches. For the remainder, it will follow LAR approval.
The GO and EOP procedures will be changed as required to support the issuance of Unit 2 EOPs. This is currently procedurally defined as sometime between completion of Hot Functional Testing and fuel load. Although an actual date can not be identified, the entire Unit 2 EOP network will be required to be in place prior to operation of Unit 2.
The GO and EOP procedures will be changed as required to support the issuance of Unit 2 EOPs. This is currently procedurally defined as sometime between completion of Hot Functional Testing and fuel load. Although an actual date can not be identified, the entire Unit 2 EOP network will be required to be in place prior to operation of Unit 2.
The guidance needed to realign lineups required in the CCS and ERCW systems is currently in place. Therefore, no future change to these procedures is required to implement these actions. Although it is possible that validations of the procedures remaining to be issued might identify a note or other informational enhancements that might be required, they would not constitute a condition that would prevent issuing the revised procedures.
The guidance needed to realign lineups required in the CCS and ERCW systems is currently in place. Therefore, no future change to these procedures is required to implement these actions. Although it is possible that validations of the procedures remaining to be issued might identify a note or other informational enhancements that might be required, they would not constitute a condition that would prevent issuing the revised procedures.
HF - 8                                                 Two hard copies of each units TS are available in the MCR. One is maintained at the US station and the other is at the SM desk. TS are also available electronically via the WBN Describe how the operators access and use              electronic document storage and retrieval system known as the Business Support Library Technical Specifications (e.g., if they are available  (BSL). Access to BSL for documents is routinely performed by the operating staff to print 35.
: 35.
electronically, as a hard copy, etc.). Describe the    copies for performing surveillance instructions and to verify that the hard copies used are interface between the Emergency Operating              the current revision of the procedure.
HF - 8 Describe how the operators access and use Technical Specifications (e.g., if they are available electronically, as a hard copy, etc.). Describe the interface between the Emergency Operating procedures and Technical Specifications, specifically, if the procedures refer the operator to the Technical Two hard copies of each units TS are available in the MCR. One is maintained at the US station and the other is at the SM desk. TS are also available electronically via the WBN electronic document storage and retrieval system known as the Business Support Library (BSL). Access to BSL for documents is routinely performed by the operating staff to print copies for performing surveillance instructions and to verify that the hard copies used are the current revision of the procedure.
procedures and Technical Specifications, specifically, if the procedures refer the operator to the Technical  The Abnormal Operating Instructions (AOI) identify the potential TS that could be Page 43 of 64
The Abnormal Operating Instructions (AOI) identify the potential TS that could be  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted Specifications                                      impacted by the particular event in a list format. When entry into the AOI procedures occurs, this list and TS will be referenced to identify any TS limitations or required actions.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 44 of 64
Date Posted: 07/31/15                                This is particularly important in the AOI network, as these are the instructions that are used to combat emergencies in a condition where the plant may maintain operation in Modes 1 and 2.
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Specifications Date Posted: 07/31/15 impacted by the particular event in a list format. When entry into the AOI procedures occurs, this list and TS will be referenced to identify any TS limitations or required actions.
This is particularly important in the AOI network, as these are the instructions that are used to combat emergencies in a condition where the plant may maintain operation in Modes 1 and 2.
The emergency operating instructions (EOI) do not contain direct reference to TS information. This network will be utilized following a reactor trip and presuppose a condition adverse to TS has occurred such as loss of primary pressure boundary, complete loss of AC power, steam generator (SG) tube leak, or steam line rupture for which the potential TS limitations or required actions are secondary to ensuring that immediate actions are taken to place or restore the plant to a stable condition. In the case of entry into the EOI network, conforming to the Westinghouse developed Emergency Response Guidelines (ERG) ensures the plant is maintained in the safest condition for the event. It would then become the responsibility of the operating staff and the emergency response organization to identify potential impacts to TS equipment that may influence future actions that are the result of the plant condition.
The emergency operating instructions (EOI) do not contain direct reference to TS information. This network will be utilized following a reactor trip and presuppose a condition adverse to TS has occurred such as loss of primary pressure boundary, complete loss of AC power, steam generator (SG) tube leak, or steam line rupture for which the potential TS limitations or required actions are secondary to ensuring that immediate actions are taken to place or restore the plant to a stable condition. In the case of entry into the EOI network, conforming to the Westinghouse developed Emergency Response Guidelines (ERG) ensures the plant is maintained in the safest condition for the event. It would then become the responsibility of the operating staff and the emergency response organization to identify potential impacts to TS equipment that may influence future actions that are the result of the plant condition.
HF - 9                                               Training representatives are part of the team that reviews DCN and LAR impacts. In addition, one of the responsibilities of the Operations member reviewing impacts is to Describe the plans and schedules for revising the    make a determination if training is impacted and to inform the appropriate training training program, to reflect the changes in the      management representative if training is required.
: 36.
proposed license amendment. Clarify if training will be provided prior to implementation of the proposed  The training associated with these changes will be performed in multiple formats.
HF - 9 Describe the plans and schedules for revising the training program, to reflect the changes in the proposed license amendment. Clarify if training will be provided prior to implementation of the proposed changes.
changes.                                            Relevant DCN impacts to the plant are included each licensed operator requalification (LOR) cycle in the Plant Changes portion. The Plant Changes training covers DCN Date Posted: 07/31/15                                changes, procedure changes, relevant industry events and significant corrective action 36.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 Training representatives are part of the team that reviews DCN and LAR impacts. In addition, one of the responsibilities of the Operations member reviewing impacts is to make a determination if training is impacted and to inform the appropriate training management representative if training is required.
events.
The training associated with these changes will be performed in multiple formats.
The training changes required for this change are tracked in the corrective action program. The training needs analysis has been performed. Additions to the Changes Lesson Plan and the lesson plans associated with the ERCW System and CCS will be complete for the next scheduled LOR training cycle. All training will be complete prior to the implementation of the license amendment request.
Relevant DCN impacts to the plant are included each licensed operator requalification (LOR) cycle in the Plant Changes portion. The Plant Changes training covers DCN changes, procedure changes, relevant industry events and significant corrective action events.
Page 44 of 64
The training changes required for this change are tracked in the corrective action program. The training needs analysis has been performed. Additions to the Changes Lesson Plan and the lesson plans associated with the ERCW System and CCS will be complete for the next scheduled LOR training cycle. All training will be complete prior to the implementation of the license amendment request.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                           Date Posted HF - 10                                                 NPG-SPP-01.2.1, Interim Administration of Site Technical Procedures for Watts Bar 1 and 2, contains the requirements that must be met when developing or revising technical Describe the process used to verify and validate the    procedures. This would apply to the SOIs and GOs associated with the change. As ability of TVAs operators to accomplish tasks          defined in the procedure review verification checklist (Attachment 3) of this procedure, required for the proposed license amendment. In lieu    various activities are performed to ensure that the procedure guidance is developed in a of a description, relevant administrative procedure(s)  manner that includes consideration for human factors.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 45 of 64
for verification and validation or a verification and validation plan for the proposed change (if            The following is a list of some of the items that are required to be verified in procedure developed) may be provided. In your response,          development:
Item No.
clarify if the validation will include a representative sample of operators and whether it will be performed    Does the procedure agree with and reference applicable drawings?
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
with Technical Specification minimum staffing and      Can the procedure be correctly performed in the designated sequence?
: 37.
nominal staffing.                                      Are equipment numbers and nomenclature used in the procedure identifiable to those displayed on the equipment?
HF - 10 Describe the process used to verify and validate the ability of TVAs operators to accomplish tasks required for the proposed license amendment. In lieu of a description, relevant administrative procedure(s) for verification and validation or a verification and validation plan for the proposed change (if developed) may be provided. In your response, clarify if the validation will include a representative sample of operators and whether it will be performed with Technical Specification minimum staffing and nominal staffing.
Date Posted: 07/31/15                                  Can equipment identified in the procedure be easily located?
Date Posted: 07/31/15 NPG-SPP-01.2.1, Interim Administration of Site Technical Procedures for Watts Bar 1 and 2, contains the requirements that must be met when developing or revising technical procedures. This would apply to the SOIs and GOs associated with the change. As defined in the procedure review verification checklist (Attachment 3) of this procedure, various activities are performed to ensure that the procedure guidance is developed in a manner that includes consideration for human factors.
The following is a list of some of the items that are required to be verified in procedure development:
Does the procedure agree with and reference applicable drawings?
Can the procedure be correctly performed in the designated sequence?
Are equipment numbers and nomenclature used in the procedure identifiable to those displayed on the equipment?
Can equipment identified in the procedure be easily located?
Are the units of measurement used in the procedure to record readings the same as those displayed on the equipment?
Are the units of measurement used in the procedure to record readings the same as those displayed on the equipment?
: 37.                                                        Have human factors and system interactions been properly considered?
Have human factors and system interactions been properly considered?
Procedures are walked down after development to ensure that the information provided in the procedure agrees with conditions in the field. Personnel who would normally perform the task are the individuals who are tasked with these walkdowns to ensure that the developed content provides the level of detail that is needed to successfully perform the evolution.
Procedures are walked down after development to ensure that the information provided in the procedure agrees with conditions in the field. Personnel who would normally perform the task are the individuals who are tasked with these walkdowns to ensure that the developed content provides the level of detail that is needed to successfully perform the evolution.
For the emergency operating network, TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI)
For the emergency operating network, TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI)
Control, contains a more specific validation process. This instruction defines what validation method should be used based on the change, the persons that should make up the validation team, how the validation is conducted and how the validation is documented.
Control, contains a more specific validation process. This instruction defines what validation method should be used based on the change, the persons that should make up the validation team, how the validation is conducted and how the validation is documented.
In all cases involving the EOI network, consideration is taken on whether the task can be performed by the minimum shift compliment. If it is judged that the task would interfere with the ability of minimum shift staffing requirements, then efforts are taken to either redevelop the desired process or increase the required staffing as an interim measure.
In all cases involving the EOI network, consideration is taken on whether the task can be performed by the minimum shift compliment. If it is judged that the task would interfere with the ability of minimum shift staffing requirements, then efforts are taken to either redevelop the desired process or increase the required staffing as an interim measure.  
Page 45 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                         Date Posted HF - 11                                               TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI) Control, contains direction that is intended to address this very concern. For the current modification, the EOI network Describe the process used to monitor new and          contains the only procedures that this issue might apply to.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 46 of 64
changed operator actions to ensure that they remain feasible and reliable over the long term, and are not Limitations presented by having additional persons to perform the CCS and ERCW degraded due to design changes, inadequate            alignments prior to entering Mode 4 do not represent a safety concern. If insufficient staff training, or other mechanisms.                        is available to accomplish these alignments, then entry into Mode 4 will be prohibited.
Item No.
This represents a station efficiency and outage completion concern and not a safety Date Posted: 07/31/15                                concern. In practice, Operations crews transition to super crew alignment approximately two weeks prior to the start of the outage, so sufficient personnel will be available to prevent this from being a concern.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
: 38.
HF - 11 Describe the process used to monitor new and changed operator actions to ensure that they remain feasible and reliable over the long term, and are not degraded due to design changes, inadequate training, or other mechanisms.
Date Posted: 07/31/15 TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI) Control, contains direction that is intended to address this very concern. For the current modification, the EOI network contains the only procedures that this issue might apply to.
Limitations presented by having additional persons to perform the CCS and ERCW alignments prior to entering Mode 4 do not represent a safety concern. If insufficient staff is available to accomplish these alignments, then entry into Mode 4 will be prohibited.
This represents a station efficiency and outage completion concern and not a safety concern. In practice, Operations crews transition to super crew alignment approximately two weeks prior to the start of the outage, so sufficient personnel will be available to prevent this from being a concern.
The actions taken in the EOI network require an initial assessment for this very concern.
The actions taken in the EOI network require an initial assessment for this very concern.
In addition, any future revisions are required to evaluate whether minimum operator 38.
In addition, any future revisions are required to evaluate whether minimum operator staffing levels are impacted by the proposed change.
staffing levels are impacted by the proposed change.
Operator requalification training on EOIs provides a means of periodically verifying the technical adequacy of emergency instructions. Operators and training personnel are responsible for ensuring that problems or discrepancies discovered in EOIs during training are documented using a Condition Report or Procedure Change Request (PCR), as appropriate. Proposed enhancements and suggestions for improvement of EOIs are also encouraged.
Operator requalification training on EOIs provides a means of periodically verifying the technical adequacy of emergency instructions. Operators and training personnel are responsible for ensuring that problems or discrepancies discovered in EOIs during training are documented using a Condition Report or Procedure Change Request (PCR), as appropriate. Proposed enhancements and suggestions for improvement of EOIs are also encouraged.
Should a future attempt be made to change the operation of the bypass switches, plant processes would identify that this would require a 10 CFR 50.59 review. This review would prevent future manipulations that would have a negative impact on maintaining plant safety.
Should a future attempt be made to change the operation of the bypass switches, plant processes would identify that this would require a 10 CFR 50.59 review. This review would prevent future manipulations that would have a negative impact on maintaining plant safety.
HF - 12                                               There will be a total of four bypass switches installed, one on each 6.9 kV shutdown board. Each bypass switch will bypass the interlock that prevents two ERCW Pumps from TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review              being powered from the same shutdown board.
: 39.
Questions dated July 14, 2015 (ADAMS Accession 39.
HF - 12 TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Questions dated July 14, 2015 (ADAMS Accession Number ML15197A357), Question 5, Item 4 states:
Number ML15197A357), Question 5, Item 4 states:      Only one annunciator will be added. The ERCW annunciator panel in the MCR is a An interlock bypass switch for ERCW pumps will be    common annunciator panel (does not have a separate panel for Unit 1 and Unit 2).
An interlock bypass switch for ERCW pumps will be installed as described above and in the license amendment request. An annunciator window will be There will be a total of four bypass switches installed, one on each 6.9 kV shutdown board. Each bypass switch will bypass the interlock that prevents two ERCW Pumps from being powered from the same shutdown board.
installed as described above and in the license      Pictures of the MCR annunciator panel and the window for this alarm are included at the amendment request. An annunciator window will be      end of this enclosure.
Only one annunciator will be added. The ERCW annunciator panel in the MCR is a common annunciator panel (does not have a separate panel for Unit 1 and Unit 2).
Page 46 of 64
Pictures of the MCR annunciator panel and the window for this alarm are included at the end of this enclosure.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted added in the main control room to show when an interlock bypass switch has been activated.             The main function of the alarm is to alert the operations staff should the switch be moved from its normal position during normal operations. (See pictures of switch at the end of Clarify how many interlock bypass switches will be      this enclosure). In this case, the ARI will direct that an operator be dispatched to the installed and how many annunciator windows will be      6.9 kV shutdown boards to determine which switch has been moved to the bypass added. Further, clarify if all bypass switches will be  position.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 47 of 64
identical in design an appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling                          All bypass switches will be identical in design and appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling, which is unique for each 6.9 kV shutdown board.
Item No.
HF - 13                                                 This response supersedes the response provided on June 17, 2015. The procedure guidance for aligning either CCS Pump 1B-B or 2B-B previously existed in 0-SOI-70.01, TVAs application dated June 17, 2015 (ADAMS             thus no change is required to this instruction for the proposed changes.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted added in the main control room to show when an interlock bypass switch has been activated.
Accession Number ML15170A474), Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, states, in part: The following procedures will be affected
Clarify how many interlock bypass switches will be installed and how many annunciator windows will be added. Further, clarify if all bypass switches will be identical in design an appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling The main function of the alarm is to alert the operations staff should the switch be moved from its normal position during normal operations. (See pictures of switch at the end of this enclosure). In this case, the ARI will direct that an operator be dispatched to the 6.9 kV shutdown boards to determine which switch has been moved to the bypass position.
: 40. System Operating Instruction SOI-70.01, Component Cooling Water (CCS) System. This SOI does not require a revision because the steps to realign the CCS Train B pumps are currently in the procedure.
All bypass switches will be identical in design and appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling, which is unique for each 6.9 kV shutdown board.
: 40.
HF - 13 TVAs application dated June 17, 2015 (ADAMS Accession Number ML15170A474), Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, states, in part: The following procedures will be affected System Operating Instruction SOI-70.01, Component Cooling Water (CCS) System. This SOI does not require a revision because the steps to realign the CCS Train B pumps are currently in the procedure.
Clarify how SOI-70.01 is affected by the changes proposed in this LAR, if it does not require a revision.
Clarify how SOI-70.01 is affected by the changes proposed in this LAR, if it does not require a revision.
SCVB-RAI-1                                               (a) The material properties chosen are intended to represent the three most common structural materials in the RCS; stainless steel 304, stainless steel 316, and low alloy Reference 1, Attachment to Enclosure 1,                        carbon steel.
This response supersedes the response provided on June 17, 2015. The procedure guidance for aligning either CCS Pump 1B-B or 2B-B previously existed in 0-SOI-70.01, thus no change is required to this instruction for the proposed changes.
Westinghouse Summary Report, Section 4.4.1.3, seventh bullet in the summarized assumptions for        (b) The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part D (Reference 1) mass and energy release analysis states                        [hereafter referred to as "the ASME BPVC" (Reference 1)] was used as the source of
: 41.
: 41.                                                                the material property data. Table PRD provides material densities in units of lbm/in3.
SCVB-RAI-1 Reference 1, Attachment to Enclosure 1, Westinghouse Summary Report, Section 4.4.1.3, seventh bullet in the summarized assumptions for mass and energy release analysis states Density and specific heat values of 501 lbm/ft2 and 0.145 BTU/lbm-&deg;F, respectively, model a volumetric heat capacity which bounds the values found in Part D of the ASME boiler pressure vessel code.
Density and specific heat values of 501 lbm/ft2 and          The density of 0.29 lbm/in3 (converted to 501 lbm/ft3) is representative of the density 0.145 BTU/lbm-&deg;F, respectively, model a volumetric            at a cold state of 70&deg;F for Stainless Steel 304 and Stainless Steel 316. The density heat capacity which bounds the values found in                of carbon steel at a cold state of 70&deg;F is listed as 0.28 lbm/in3 (converted to Part D of the ASME boiler pressure vessel code.              484 lbm/ft3). The bulk of the metal mass in the reactor vessel and the steam generators is carbon steel. The density of stainless steel, 501 lbm/ft 3, was (a) Provide the material specification for which the          conservatively applied to all steel alloys (note that the steam generator tube material Page 47 of 64
(a) Provide the material specification for which the (a) The material properties chosen are intended to represent the three most common structural materials in the RCS; stainless steel 304, stainless steel 316, and low alloy carbon steel.
(b) The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part D (Reference 1)
[hereafter referred to as "the ASME BPVC" (Reference 1)] was used as the source of the material property data. Table PRD provides material densities in units of lbm/in3.
The density of 0.29 lbm/in3 (converted to 501 lbm/ft3) is representative of the density at a cold state of 70&deg;F for Stainless Steel 304 and Stainless Steel 316. The density of carbon steel at a cold state of 70&deg;F is listed as 0.28 lbm/in3 (converted to 484 lbm/ft3). The bulk of the metal mass in the reactor vessel and the steam generators is carbon steel. The density of stainless steel, 501 lbm/ft3, was conservatively applied to all steel alloys (note that the steam generator tube material  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted above density and specific heat values are             is treated separately) in the LOCA Mass and Energy (M&E) calculations to maximize assumed.                                              the metal mass.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 48 of 64
(b) Confirm that the assumed density 501 lbm/ft3        (c) The specific heat (as a function of temperature) was determined for each material by bounds the values given in Part D of the ASME        using the following information from the ASME BPVC (Reference 1); the equation Section II Boiler and Pressure Vessel code            relating thermal conductivity, thermal diffusivity, density, and specific heat from the instead of Part D of ASME boiler pressure            Table TCD General Notes, thermal expansion coefficients in Tables TE-1 through vessel code, If not provide more information          TE-4, thermal conductivities in Table TCD, and thermal diffusivities in Table TCD. An regarding the source of the assumed value of          uncertainty of 10% was added to the calculated specific heat values.
Item No.
density.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted above density and specific heat values are assumed.
The computer codes that are part of the WCAP-10325-P-A evaluation model are (c) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC),            constructed such that a single specific heat value is required. Therefore, a bounding Section II, Part D does not provide specific heat      value of 0.145 BTU/lbm&deg;F provides a conservative estimate of the total amount of values. Please state the source document of the        metal energy over the temperature range that is relevant in a LOCA M&E calculation ASME specific heat of the RCS metal which is          (metal cools down from approximately 600&deg;F to 200&deg;F) for all three of the structural bounded by the assumed specific heat of 0.145          steel alloys.
(b) Confirm that the assumed density 501 lbm/ft3 bounds the values given in Part D of the ASME Section II Boiler and Pressure Vessel code instead of Part D of ASME boiler pressure vessel code, If not provide more information regarding the source of the assumed value of density.
BTU/lbm-&deg;F given in the above statement.
(c) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC),
Section II, Part D does not provide specific heat values. Please state the source document of the ASME specific heat of the RCS metal which is bounded by the assumed specific heat of 0.145 BTU/lbm-&deg;F given in the above statement.
is treated separately) in the LOCA Mass and Energy (M&E) calculations to maximize the metal mass.
(c) The specific heat (as a function of temperature) was determined for each material by using the following information from the ASME BPVC (Reference 1); the equation relating thermal conductivity, thermal diffusivity, density, and specific heat from the Table TCD General Notes, thermal expansion coefficients in Tables TE-1 through TE-4, thermal conductivities in Table TCD, and thermal diffusivities in Table TCD. An uncertainty of 10% was added to the calculated specific heat values.
The computer codes that are part of the WCAP-10325-P-A evaluation model are constructed such that a single specific heat value is required. Therefore, a bounding value of 0.145 BTU/lbm&deg;F provides a conservative estimate of the total amount of metal energy over the temperature range that is relevant in a LOCA M&E calculation (metal cools down from approximately 600&deg;F to 200&deg;F) for all three of the structural steel alloys.  


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
: 1. An International Code, 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2010 Edition, July 1, 2010, Section II, Part D, Properties (Customary), Materials, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee on Materials, Three Park Avenue, New York, NY, 10016 USA.
: 1.
SCVB-RAI-2                                             The difference between 2,750,700 lbs and the analytical value of 2,585,000 lbs considers losses due to sublimation only. The surveillance requirements address uncertainties Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Section 4.0, Conclusions,  introduced through weighing.
An International Code, 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2010 Edition, July 1, 2010, Section II, Part D, Properties (Customary), Materials, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee on Materials, Three Park Avenue, New York, NY, 10016 USA.
first paragraph states calculated values of the ice weight from containment analysis 2,585,000 lbs with    (a) The Surveillance Requirement value of 2,750,700 pounds contains a sublimation an average ice basket weight of 1,330 lbs. The              allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement
: 42.
: 42. second paragraph states an ice weight specified in          uncertainty. The fact that the value does not include the measurement uncertainty is Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.6.11.2 will be              stated in the Technical Specification Bases for SR 3.6.11.2 and 3. Surveillance 2,750,700 lbs with a per basket value of 1415 lbs            Instruction 1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Condenser Surveillance states that the specified in SR 3.6.11.2 and SR 3.6.11.3.                    instrument uncertainty must be added to the SR ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately (a) Please confirm that the difference between the          +15 lbs.
SCVB-RAI-2 Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Section 4.0, Conclusions, first paragraph states calculated values of the ice weight from containment analysis 2,585,000 lbs with an average ice basket weight of 1,330 lbs. The second paragraph states an ice weight specified in Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.6.11.2 will be 2,750,700 lbs with a per basket value of 1415 lbs specified in SR 3.6.11.2 and SR 3.6.11.3.
SR value 2,750,000 lbs and the analytical value Page 48 of 64
(a) Please confirm that the difference between the SR value 2,750,000 lbs and the analytical value The difference between 2,750,700 lbs and the analytical value of 2,585,000 lbs considers losses due to sublimation only. The surveillance requirements address uncertainties introduced through weighing.
(a) The Surveillance Requirement value of 2,750,700 pounds contains a sublimation allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement uncertainty. The fact that the value does not include the measurement uncertainty is stated in the Technical Specification Bases for SR 3.6.11.2 and 3. Surveillance Instruction 1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Condenser Surveillance states that the instrument uncertainty must be added to the SR ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately  
+15 lbs.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item               NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                        Date Posted 2,585,000 lbs considers the sublimation         (b) The method used for determining the sublimation rate is from cycle to cycle ice allowance and the measurement uncertainty              basket weighing. The as-left basket weight is compared to the as-found basket during surveillance. If so, how much individual        weight in the next cycle for the same basket. Overall trends for the ice bed at large margins are provided for sublimation and              and on a row group basis are also used to validate the sublimation rate. Historical measurement uncertainty. If not, explain the          data for WBN Unit 1 and for Sequoyah Nuclear Plant have shown cycle to cycle basis for the difference between the two values.      sublimation rates of around three percent. The selection of six percent is based on engineering judgment to provide a large safety margin.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 49 of 64
(b) Please explain the methodology used for calculating the sublimation allowance. What are  The FSAR 6.7.14.3 will be updated to reflect the following.
Item No.
the assumed initial parameters (such as ice temperature, environment temperature in the ice  Sublimation - Historical condenser, etc) for the calculation?
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted 2,585,000 lbs considers the sublimation allowance and the measurement uncertainty during surveillance. If so, how much individual margins are provided for sublimation and measurement uncertainty. If not, explain the basis for the difference between the two values.
The following information was developed during the design and initial operation of the ice condenser system. Actual sublimation rates have been established during the operation of Watts Bar and are discussed in the Section entitled Sublimation - Actual.
(b) Please explain the methodology used for calculating the sublimation allowance. What are the assumed initial parameters (such as ice temperature, environment temperature in the ice condenser, etc) for the calculation?
(b) The method used for determining the sublimation rate is from cycle to cycle ice basket weighing. The as-left basket weight is compared to the as-found basket weight in the next cycle for the same basket. Overall trends for the ice bed at large and on a row group basis are also used to validate the sublimation rate. Historical data for WBN Unit 1 and for Sequoyah Nuclear Plant have shown cycle to cycle sublimation rates of around three percent. The selection of six percent is based on engineering judgment to provide a large safety margin.
The FSAR 6.7.14.3 will be updated to reflect the following.
Sublimation - Historical The following information was developed during the design and initial operation of the ice condenser system. Actual sublimation rates have been established during the operation of Watts Bar and are discussed in the Section entitled Sublimation - Actual.
The other mechanism that affects the long-term storage of the ice is sublimation.
The other mechanism that affects the long-term storage of the ice is sublimation.
Sublimation has several effects inside the ice condenser. The geometry of the ice mass changes where sublimation occurs, and the resulting vapor is deposited on a colder surface at another location inside the ice condenser.
Sublimation has several effects inside the ice condenser. The geometry of the ice mass changes where sublimation occurs, and the resulting vapor is deposited on a colder surface at another location inside the ice condenser.
In normal cold storage room application, the cooling coil is exposed to the air in the room, and moisture in the air freezes on the coil. If ice is stored in the room, all of ice eventually migrates to the coil (which is defrosted periodically, draining the water outside the room) through a sublimation-mass transfer mechanism. To avoid the mechanism, and maintain a constant mass of ice, the ice condenser is provided with double wall insulation. The annular gap between the insulated walls is provided with a heat sink in the form of a flow of cool, dry air that enters arid and leaves through the insulated panels.
In normal cold storage room application, the cooling coil is exposed to the air in the room, and moisture in the air freezes on the coil. If ice is stored in the room, all of ice eventually migrates to the coil (which is defrosted periodically, draining the water outside the room) through a sublimation-mass transfer mechanism. To avoid the mechanism, and maintain a constant mass of ice, the ice condenser is provided with double wall insulation. The annular gap between the insulated walls is provided with a heat sink in the form of a flow of cool, dry air that enters arid and leaves through the insulated panels.
However, a small amount of heat enters the system through the inlet doors, which are not double insulated, and also through the double layer insulation system. The effect of this heat gain on the ice condenser has been examined analytically. An analytical model of the sublimation process has been developed to provide an estimate of the expected sublimation rate as well as identify the significant parameters affecting the sublimation rate. The model developed a relationship identifying the fraction of total heat input which sublimes ice (the rest of the heat raises the temperature of the air, which transports the Page 49 of 64
However, a small amount of heat enters the system through the inlet doors, which are not double insulated, and also through the double layer insulation system. The effect of this heat gain on the ice condenser has been examined analytically. An analytical model of the sublimation process has been developed to provide an estimate of the expected sublimation rate as well as identify the significant parameters affecting the sublimation rate. The model developed a relationship identifying the fraction of total heat input which sublimes ice (the rest of the heat raises the temperature of the air, which transports the  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item     NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.          Date Posted vapor to the cold surface where it freezes).
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 50 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted vapor to the cold surface where it freezes).
The sublimation fraction depends on the difference in vapor pressure between warmest and coldest air temperatures within the ice condenser. The sublimation fraction decreases as the T decreases and also as the average ice condenser temperature decreases. For an average temperature of 15&deg;F in the ice condenser compartment, the analytical model predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of heat gain to the ice storage compartment. The final heat gain calculations identified a heat gain into the ice storage compartment of 1 to 1.5 tons, most of which enters the compartment through the doors.
The sublimation fraction depends on the difference in vapor pressure between warmest and coldest air temperatures within the ice condenser. The sublimation fraction decreases as the T decreases and also as the average ice condenser temperature decreases. For an average temperature of 15&deg;F in the ice condenser compartment, the analytical model predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of heat gain to the ice storage compartment. The final heat gain calculations identified a heat gain into the ice storage compartment of 1 to 1.5 tons, most of which enters the compartment through the doors.
For the purposes of this report, it is assumed that the reference heat gain for the unit is 1 ton, and therefore, the calculated reference sublimation rate would be 1% of the ice weight per year.
For the purposes of this report, it is assumed that the reference heat gain for the unit is 1 ton, and therefore, the calculated reference sublimation rate would be 1% of the ice weight per year.
Line 534: Line 764:
The surveillance acceptance criteria contain a sublimation allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement uncertainty. Instrument uncertainty must be added to the surveillance requirement ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately +15 lbs.
The surveillance acceptance criteria contain a sublimation allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement uncertainty. Instrument uncertainty must be added to the surveillance requirement ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately +15 lbs.
The Ice Bed Temperature is maintained between 15&deg;F and 20&deg;F during plant operation.
The Ice Bed Temperature is maintained between 15&deg;F and 20&deg;F during plant operation.
The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating in this Page 50 of 64
The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating in this  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted temperature range. Procedures require actions to restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach 23&deg;F.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 51 of 64
SCVB-RAI-3                                             TVA has clarified the referenced FSAR Section (6.7) to designate the current verbiage as historical and provided the empirical operational basis for how sublimation is calculated in FSAR Amendment 113, under heading Sublimation,       response to SCVB-RAI-2.
Item No.
page 6.7-64 states:
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted temperature range. Procedures require actions to restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach 23&deg;F.
(a) and (b)  The verbiage in question is part of the historical basis for ice condenser For an average temperature of 15oF in the ice                       operation. The new operational basis consists of the following. The Ice Bed condenser compartment, the analytical model                           Temperature is maintained between 15&deg;F and 20&deg;F during plant operation.
: 43.
predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice                   The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of                     in this temperature range. Procedure (ARI-138-144) requires actions to heat gain to the ice storage compartment.                           restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach The ice condenser compartment temperature of 15&#xba;F                     23&deg;F.
SCVB-RAI-3 FSAR Amendment 113, under heading Sublimation, page 6.7-64 states:
: 43. specified in the above statement is not consistent with the ice bay air temperature of 27&#xba;F specified in Table 1 of Reference 1, Enclosure 1.
For an average temperature of 15oF in the ice condenser compartment, the analytical model predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of heat gain to the ice storage compartment.
The ice condenser compartment temperature of 15&#xba;F specified in the above statement is not consistent with the ice bay air temperature of 27&#xba;F specified in Table 1 of Reference 1, Enclosure 1.
(a) Correct the ice condenser compartment temperature in the above statement from 15&#xba;F to 27oF, or provide justification for the difference.
(a) Correct the ice condenser compartment temperature in the above statement from 15&#xba;F to 27oF, or provide justification for the difference.
(b) Recalculate the sublimation rate based on ice compartment air temperature of 27&#xba;F, and provide its impact on the sublimation allowance.
(b) Recalculate the sublimation rate based on ice compartment air temperature of 27&#xba;F, and provide its impact on the sublimation allowance.
SCVB-RAI-4                                             The proposed long-term LOCA containment integrity analysis used the reviewed and approved LOTIC-1 code. Internal to the configured LOTIC-1 code is a limit placed on the Reference 1, Enclosure 2, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant      stagnation heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2-&deg;F.
TVA has clarified the referenced FSAR Section (6.7) to designate the current verbiage as historical and provided the empirical operational basis for how sublimation is calculated in response to SCVB-RAI-2.
Unit 2 Revised FSAR Section 6.2.1 Pages, page 6.2.1-8, under heading Structural Heat Removal,      This can be seen from the stagnation heat transfer coefficient presented in Equation 54 in 44.
(a) and (b)
states a Tagami heat transfer coefficient for the lower WCAP-8355-P-A, Long Term Ice Condenser Containment Code LOTIC Code, April containment compartment structures was limited to      1976. When the steam to air ratio is 1.4, Hstag is limited to 72 Btu/hr ft2-&deg;F.
The verbiage in question is part of the historical basis for ice condenser operation. The new operational basis consists of the following. The Ice Bed Temperature is maintained between 15&deg;F and 20&deg;F during plant operation.
72 Btu/hr-ft2.
The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating in this temperature range. Procedure (ARI-138-144) requires actions to restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach 23&deg;F.
Enclosure 1, Attachment Westinghouse Summary Page 51 of 64
: 44.
SCVB-RAI-4 Reference 1, Enclosure 2, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 2 Revised FSAR Section 6.2.1 Pages, page 6.2.1-8, under heading Structural Heat Removal, states a Tagami heat transfer coefficient for the lower containment compartment structures was limited to 72 Btu/hr-ft2.
, Attachment Westinghouse Summary The proposed long-term LOCA containment integrity analysis used the reviewed and approved LOTIC-1 code. Internal to the configured LOTIC-1 code is a limit placed on the stagnation heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2-&deg;F.
This can be seen from the stagnation heat transfer coefficient presented in Equation 54 in WCAP-8355-P-A, Long Term Ice Condenser Containment Code LOTIC Code, April 1976. When the steam to air ratio is 1.4, Hstag is limited to 72 Btu/hr ft2-&deg;F.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted Report, Section 4.4.3.3, Structural Heat Removal, page 42, mentions Tagami correlations for the heat transfer coefficient for the lower compartment structures were used in the proposed analysis, but does not provide its value. Confirm that the proposed analysis used heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2 consistent with the FSAR. In case it is changed, please revise the FSAR and justify if a less conservative (greater) value was used.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 52 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Report, Section 4.4.3.3, Structural Heat Removal, page 42, mentions Tagami correlations for the heat transfer coefficient for the lower compartment structures were used in the proposed analysis, but does not provide its value. Confirm that the proposed analysis used heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2 consistent with the FSAR. In case it is changed, please revise the FSAR and justify if a less conservative (greater) value was used.
No changes were made to the code for this proposed analysis, so the structural heat transfer coefficient limit of 72 Btu/ht-ft2-&deg;F described in the Structural Heat Removal subsection at the end of FSAR Section 6.2.1.3.3 continues to exist.
No changes were made to the code for this proposed analysis, so the structural heat transfer coefficient limit of 72 Btu/ht-ft2-&deg;F described in the Structural Heat Removal subsection at the end of FSAR Section 6.2.1.3.3 continues to exist.
SCVB-RAI-5                                               According to the Revision log for SDD N3-61-4001, Westinghouse performed a post-LOCA containment sump boron concentration analysis to address PER 03-006899-000.
: 45.
Reference 1, Enclosure 3, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant      The maximum ice weight used as an input to the Westinghouse Analysis was 3.0 x 106 Unit 2 Revised Pages for TS and TS Bases 3.6.11,        lbs. DCN D51416-A revised the SDD to ensure the maximum total ice condenser weight SR 3.6.11.2a weighs samples  144 ice baskets and        does not exceed 3.0 x 106 lbs.
SCVB-RAI-5 Reference 1, Enclosure 3, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 2 Revised Pages for TS and TS Bases 3.6.11, SR 3.6.11.2a weighs samples 144 ice baskets and verifies each basket contains 1415 lbs of ice. This surveillance allows individual baskets to weigh greater than 1415 lbs. FSAR Amendment 113, Section 6.7.6.1, page 6.7-22, specifies maximum total ice weight 3x106 lbs which results in an individual ice basket weight (3x106/1944) = 1543.2 lbs.
verifies each basket contains  1415 lbs of ice. This surveillance allows individual baskets to weigh          Westinghouse Letter WAT-D-10850, Section 1.1, concludes the evaluation performed by greater than 1415 lbs. FSAR Amendment 113,              Westinghouse determined that the WBN ice basket maximum average loading limits and
(a) Confirm that the maximum ice weight of 3x106 lbs is based on seismic qualification test results.
: 45. Section 6.7.6.1, page 6.7-22, specifies maximum total    configuration requirements are acceptable based on seismic design allowables.
(b) Explain how, during surveillance, it would be verified that the individual ice basket weight and According to the Revision log for SDD N3-61-4001, Westinghouse performed a post-LOCA containment sump boron concentration analysis to address PER 03-006899-000.
ice weight 3x106 lbs which results in an individual ice basket weight (3x106/1944) = 1543.2 lbs.                The configuration shown is 1/3 of 1944 baskets (648 baskets) at a maximum ice weight including basket of 1809 lbs, another 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including (a) Confirm that the maximum ice weight of 3x106        basket of 1909 lbs and the final 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including basket of lbs is based on seismic qualification test results. 2009 lbs for a total of 3,711,096 lbs of ice (including the weight of the baskets). The weight of the ice baskets as 250 lbs for a total empty ice basket weight of 250 x 1944 =
The maximum ice weight used as an input to the Westinghouse Analysis was 3.0 x 106 lbs. DCN D51416-A revised the SDD to ensure the maximum total ice condenser weight does not exceed 3.0 x 106 lbs.
(b) Explain how, during surveillance, it would be        486,000 lbs. Therefore, WBN is seismically analyzed for 3,711,096 - 486,000 =
Westinghouse Letter WAT-D-10850, Section 1.1, concludes the evaluation performed by Westinghouse determined that the WBN ice basket maximum average loading limits and configuration requirements are acceptable based on seismic design allowables.
verified that the individual ice basket weight and  3,225,096 lbs of ice in the ice condenser. As mentioned above, the limiting maximum Page 52 of 64
The configuration shown is 1/3 of 1944 baskets (648 baskets) at a maximum ice weight including basket of 1809 lbs, another 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including basket of 1909 lbs and the final 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including basket of 2009 lbs for a total of 3,711,096 lbs of ice (including the weight of the baskets). The weight of the ice baskets as 250 lbs for a total empty ice basket weight of 250 x 1944 =
486,000 lbs. Therefore, WBN is seismically analyzed for 3,711,096 - 486,000 =
3,225,096 lbs of ice in the ice condenser. As mentioned above, the limiting maximum  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted the total ice weight in the ice condenser would value of ice is not based on the seismic qualification of the ice condenser but rather the not exceed the maximum limits.                  post-LOCA sump boron concentration.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 53 of 64
Item No.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted the total ice weight in the ice condenser would not exceed the maximum limits.
value of ice is not based on the seismic qualification of the ice condenser but rather the post-LOCA sump boron concentration.
Surveillance requirements provide acceptance criteria not to exceed the 3,000,000 lb total weight based on the sample of ice basket weights as defined by Technical Specifications.
Surveillance requirements provide acceptance criteria not to exceed the 3,000,000 lb total weight based on the sample of ice basket weights as defined by Technical Specifications.
1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Weighing, surveillance.
1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Weighing, surveillance.
Additionally, individual ice baskets weights as described above are also controlled in the surveillance procedure as follows.
Additionally, individual ice baskets weights as described above are also controlled in the surveillance procedure as follows.
: 1)   The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 1, 2 & 3 is 1,809 lbs, but 1,794 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
: 1)
: 2)   The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 4, 5 & 6 is 1,909 lbs, but 1,894 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 1, 2 & 3 is 1,809 lbs, but 1,794 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
: 3)   The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 7, 8 & 9 is 2,009 lbs, but 1,994 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
: 2)
SCVB-RAI-6                                           In addition to the design basis, this analysis accounted for the effects of other plant changes of which Westinghouse is aware. These include increased valve stroke time (of Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Attachment, Section       +13 seconds) to open the containment spray flow control valves (Reference 1), initial 4.4.1.1 states:                                     condition uncertainties on RCS temperature of +7&deg;F, and 17x17 Robust Fuel Assembly-2 (RFA-2) fuel (which may incorporate tritium-producing burnable absorber rods In addition to the design basis, this analysis     (TPBAR)). Also, the evaluation that was provided in Reference 17 with the conclusion accounted for the effects of other plant changes of that a +/- 0.2 Hz variation in the diesel frequency would have a negligible impact on the 46.
The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 4, 5 & 6 is 1,909 lbs, but 1,894 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
which Westinghouse is aware. These include           LOCA mass and energy release analysis remains valid. It should be noted that these increased..                                      items were included for completeness even though they may not be currently implemented at WBN Unit 2.
: 3)
The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 7, 8 & 9 is 2,009 lbs, but 1,994 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.
: 46.
SCVB-RAI-6 Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Attachment, Section 4.4.1.1 states:
In addition to the design basis, this analysis accounted for the effects of other plant changes of which Westinghouse is aware. These include increased..
Please describe all other changes that were incorporated in the mass and energy analysis beside the four changes described in Section 4.4.1.1.
Please describe all other changes that were incorporated in the mass and energy analysis beside the four changes described in Section 4.4.1.1.
Page 53 of 64
In addition to the design basis, this analysis accounted for the effects of other plant changes of which Westinghouse is aware. These include increased valve stroke time (of
+13 seconds) to open the containment spray flow control valves (Reference 1), initial condition uncertainties on RCS temperature of +7&deg;F, and 17x17 Robust Fuel Assembly-2 (RFA-2) fuel (which may incorporate tritium-producing burnable absorber rods (TPBAR)). Also, the evaluation that was provided in Reference 17 with the conclusion that a +/- 0.2 Hz variation in the diesel frequency would have a negligible impact on the LOCA mass and energy release analysis remains valid. It should be noted that these items were included for completeness even though they may not be currently implemented at WBN Unit 2.


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                   NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                           Date Posted SCVB-RAI-7                                           For the time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit, the LOCA is assumed to occur at 7-hours after initiation of the shutdown. The loss of Train A power is Please confirm that Loss of train A concurrent with   the limiting case for the containment analysis.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 54 of 64
loss of offsite power (LOOP) during which CCS heat exchanger (HX) C carries the heat load of both the LOCA and shutdown unit is the most limiting
Item No.
: 47. condition for the CCS fluid temperature, containment analysis parameters (containment peak pressure and temperature) and the shutdown cooling analysis. For the most limiting case of heat loads, specify at what time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit the LOCA is assumed to occur in the LOCA Unit.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted
TS - 2                                               Per LCO 3.0.2, if the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Actions is not required unless Please provide a more complete explanation of why    otherwise stated. Therefore, the Completion Times of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Conditions B of both proposed LCO 3.7.16 and          Condition B Required Actions continue until the LCO is met or is no longer Applicable.
: 47.
proposed LCO 3.7.17 have no effective completion, i.e. Once per 12 hours ? Is this condition proposed The TS Bases will be revised to reflect the follow:
SCVB-RAI-7 Please confirm that Loss of train A concurrent with loss of offsite power (LOOP) during which CCS heat exchanger (HX) C carries the heat load of both the LOCA and shutdown unit is the most limiting condition for the CCS fluid temperature, containment analysis parameters (containment peak pressure and temperature) and the shutdown cooling analysis. For the most limiting case of heat loads, specify at what time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit the LOCA is assumed to occur in the LOCA Unit.
to continue until the LCO expires i.e. 48 hours    
For the time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit, the LOCA is assumed to occur at 7-hours after initiation of the shutdown. The loss of Train A power is the limiting case for the containment analysis.
after entry into Mode 3 from Mode 1 or 2 ? The      The purpose of the guidance contained in Condition B is to ensure clear direction is given
: 48.
: 48. current basis statement for each LCO does not        to NOT enter Mode 5, if the additional ERCW and CCS alignments associated with adequately explain why no restoration action is      TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 are not performed. This assumes that the CCS and ERCW needed.                                              System meet the requirements of TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8, respectively, to support continued operation in Mode 4. In this case, with the plant in Mode 4, additional methods Date Posted: 08/25/15                                of decay heat removal are available and the potential for an uncontrolled heatup from Mode 5 should the postulated accident occur is avoided. Should additional inoperabilities impact compliance with TS 3.7.7, TS 3.7.8, or TS 3.4.6, the Actions associated with those TSs would prevail.
TS - 2 Please provide a more complete explanation of why Conditions B of both proposed LCO 3.7.16 and proposed LCO 3.7.17 have no effective completion, i.e. Once per 12 hours ? Is this condition proposed to continue until the LCO expires i.e. 48 hours after entry into Mode 3 from Mode 1 or 2 ? The current basis statement for each LCO does not adequately explain why no restoration action is needed.
TS - 4                                               LCO 3.7.16 / LCO 3.7.17 Applicability Note b was originally proposed to preclude the requirement for additional CCS and ERCW pumps if complying with Required Actions to The supplemental proposal changed the applicability  be in Mode 5, since additional failures, such as a loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, 49.
Date Posted: 08/25/15 Per LCO 3.0.2, if the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Actions is not required unless otherwise stated. Therefore, the Completion Times of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Condition B Required Actions continue until the LCO is met or is no longer Applicable.
statements for the new LCOs 3.7.16 and 3.7.17        does not have to be postulated while in a TS Action. However, as stated in the NRC without explanation in the document. Please further  scenario, if the postulated failure is the loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, the explain why the applicability statement This LCO is  GDC 5 event is still viable and the requirement for the additional CCS and ERCW pumps Page 54 of 64
The TS Bases will be revised to reflect the follow:  

The purpose of the guidance contained in Condition B is to ensure clear direction is given to NOT enter Mode 5, if the additional ERCW and CCS alignments associated with TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 are not performed. This assumes that the CCS and ERCW System meet the requirements of TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8, respectively, to support continued operation in Mode 4. In this case, with the plant in Mode 4, additional methods of decay heat removal are available and the potential for an uncontrolled heatup from Mode 5 should the postulated accident occur is avoided. Should additional inoperabilities impact compliance with TS 3.7.7, TS 3.7.8, or TS 3.4.6, the Actions associated with those TSs would prevail.
: 49.
TS - 4 The supplemental proposal changed the applicability statements for the new LCOs 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 without explanation in the document. Please further explain why the applicability statement This LCO is LCO 3.7.16 / LCO 3.7.17 Applicability Note b was originally proposed to preclude the requirement for additional CCS and ERCW pumps if complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5, since additional failures, such as a loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, does not have to be postulated while in a TS Action. However, as stated in the NRC scenario, if the postulated failure is the loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, the GDC 5 event is still viable and the requirement for the additional CCS and ERCW pumps  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Item                 NRC Question/Request TVA Response/Dated Posted No.                          Date Posted not applicable for either of the following conditions: is still required. Therefore, Applicability Note b was removed, as well as the adoption of
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 55 of 64
: b. When complying with Required Actions to be in         TSTF-273.
Item No.
Mode 5 was essentially made new Condition A in each of the new TS AND Complying with                 If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in Required Actions to be in Mode 5.                      Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred. However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient Date Posted: 08/03/15                                    to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit. Therefore, the wording of Conditions A and B provide for these two scenarios.
NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted not applicable for either of the following conditions:
TS - 5                                                   The following information was provided by TVA in letter dated June 17, 2015, Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, page E1-10:
: b. When complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5 was essentially made new Condition A in each of the new TS AND Complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5.
In a public meeting and audit discussions it has been presented that the additional ERCW pumps required        The ERCW System design was based on requiring two ERCW pumps to handle the by proposed LCO 3.7.17 are needed essentially for        cooling loads to the UHS for shutting down both units during either normal operation or in increased ERCW flow when the accident unit              the event of a LOCA and the shut down of the non-accident unit. It has been determined, switches to recirculation mode to remove heat from      for the specific set of scenarios in this evaluation, that three ERCW pumps will be required
Date Posted: 08/03/15 is still required. Therefore, Applicability Note b was removed, as well as the adoption of TSTF-273.
: 50. the accident units Containment Spray heat              if a cool down of the non-accident unit using RHR occurs within the first 48 hours after a exchangers. Please clearly articulate this point in a    shutdown. The higher heat loads associated with continuing the cool down of the unit that docketed submittal.                                      has been shut down for less than 48 hours, combined with the heat removal requirements of the safety analysis for the DBA LOCA via RHR and containment spray, necessitates Date Posted: 08/03/15                                    the use of three ERCW pumps during the initial 48 hour time period. This additional cooling capacity is required prior to placing containment spray on recirculation mode.
If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred. However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit. Therefore, the wording of Conditions A and B provide for these two scenarios.
Once the unit has been shut down for 48 hours or more, the total ERCW heat removal and thus, flow requirements, drop below the flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.
: 50.
Page 55 of 64
TS - 5 In a public meeting and audit discussions it has been presented that the additional ERCW pumps required by proposed LCO 3.7.17 are needed essentially for increased ERCW flow when the accident unit switches to recirculation mode to remove heat from the accident units Containment Spray heat exchangers. Please clearly articulate this point in a docketed submittal.
Date Posted: 08/03/15 The following information was provided by TVA in {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=letter dated June 17, 2015}}, Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, page E1-10:
The ERCW System design was based on requiring two ERCW pumps to handle the cooling loads to the UHS for shutting down both units during either normal operation or in the event of a LOCA and the shut down of the non-accident unit. It has been determined, for the specific set of scenarios in this evaluation, that three ERCW pumps will be required if a cool down of the non-accident unit using RHR occurs within the first 48 hours after a shutdown. The higher heat loads associated with continuing the cool down of the unit that has been shut down for less than 48 hours, combined with the heat removal requirements of the safety analysis for the DBA LOCA via RHR and containment spray, necessitates the use of three ERCW pumps during the initial 48 hour time period. This additional cooling capacity is required prior to placing containment spray on recirculation mode.
Once the unit has been shut down for 48 hours or more, the total ERCW heat removal and thus, flow requirements, drop below the flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request For integrated HX performance, See EPMJN010890 Table C7.7.69 and for U2 C7.7.89 At time 7-hours, provide two virtual HX models LOCA Unit Apportioned by Flow LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports Loss of Train A LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C   RHR HX     RHR HX MISC UA                    3.35     1.63 NOT IN N/A F                    1.00     0.90 SERVICE m HOT, gpm              5,000.00 3,801.98 m HOT, m#/hr                  2.47     1.86 DENSITY (of cold fluid)          61.23     61.95 M cold, gpm              4,524.89 5,000.00 M cold, m#/hr                2.22     2.48 R                    0.86     1.22 S                    -0.73     -1.15 Q (MBtu/hr)                54.80     54.80 t1 (deg. F)                  85       103 t2 (deg. F)                110       125 T2 (deg. F)                  103       136 T1 (deg. F)                  125       166 delta t (deg. F)                25       22 delta T (deg. F)                22       29 HX CORRECTION FACTOR r                              0.75 p                              0.47 F                              0.92 UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN                  2.21     1.48 M cold, DESIGN                2.95     2.48 ho, DESIGN              1,172.18 1,386.96 ho, ACTUAL              1,252.52 1,390.11 hi, DESIGN              1,013.34 2,159.37 hi, ACTUAL                807.61 2,592.56 U, ACTUAL                190.42   381.27 UA, ACTUAL                   3.35     1.63 Page 56 of 64
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 56 of 64
For integrated HX performance, See EPMJN010890 Table C7.7.69 and for U2 C7.7.89 At time 7-hours, provide two virtual HX models LOCA Unit Apportioned by Flow LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports Loss of Train A LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 3.35 1.63 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,801.98 2.47 1.86 61.23 61.95 4,524.89 5,000.00 2.22 2.48 0.86 1.22  
-0.73  
-1.15 54.80 54.80 85 103 110 125 103 136 125 166 25 22 22 29 0.75 0.47 0.92 2.21 1.48 2.95 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,252.52 1,390.11 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,592.56 190.42 381.27 UA F
m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)
M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R
S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)
T2 (deg. F)
T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)
HX CORRECTION FACTOR r
p F
UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 3.35 1.63  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request LOCA Unit Apportioned by Heat Load LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C     RHR HX       RHR HX       MISC UA                            2.64       1.63 NOT IN         N/A F                          1.00       0.90 SERVICE m HOT, gpm                    5,000.00   3,801.98 m HOT, m#/hr                        2.47       1.86 DENSITY (of cold fluid)                61.23       61.84 M cold, gpm                    3,483.59   5,000.00 M cold, m#/hr                      1.71       2.48 R                          0.62       1.22 S                          -0.88       -1.15 Q (MBtu/hr)                      54.80       54.80 t1 (deg. F)                        85         111 t2 (deg. F)                        117         133 T2 (deg. F)                        111         145 T1 (deg. F)                        133         174 delta t (deg. F)                      32         22 delta T (deg. F)                      22         29 HX CORRECTION FACTOR r                                      0.75 p                                      0.47 F                                      0.92 UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN                        1.70       1.48 M cold, DESIGN                      2.27       2.48 ho, DESIGN                    1,172.18   1,386.96 ho, ACTUAL                    1,463.36   1,388.62 hi, DESIGN                    1,013.34   2,159.37 hi, ACTUAL                      807.61   2,592.56 U, ACTUAL                        194.67     381.16 UA, ACTUAL                         2.64       1.63 Page 57 of 64
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 57 of 64
LOCA Unit Apportioned by Heat Load LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 2.64 1.63 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,801.98 2.47 1.86 61.23 61.84 3,483.59 5,000.00 1.71 2.48 0.62 1.22  
-0.88  
-1.15 54.80 54.80 85 111 117 133 111 145 133 174 32 22 22 29 0.75 0.47 0.92 1.70 1.48 2.27 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,463.36 1,388.62 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,592.56 194.67 381.16 UA F
m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)
M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R
S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)
T2 (deg. F)
T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)
HX CORRECTION FACTOR r
p F
UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 2.64 1.63  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request LOOP & Loss of Train A Shutdown Unit Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C   RHR HX     RHR HX     MISC UA                            4.12       1.57 NOT IN       N/A F                          1.00       0.90 SERVICE m HOT, gpm                    5,000.00   3,025.23 m HOT, m#/hr                        2.46       1.48 DENSITY (of cold fluid)                61.23     61.92 M cold, gpm                    5,679.60   5,000.00 M cold, m#/hr                      2.79       2.48 R                          1.22       1.47 S                          -0.63     -1.25 Q (MBtu/hr)                      89.27     89.27 t1 (deg. F)                        85       105 t2 (deg. F)                        117       141 T2 (deg. F)                        105       156 T1 (deg. F)                        141       216 delta t (deg. F)                      32         36 delta T (deg. F)                      36         60 HX CORRECTION FACTOR r                                      0.60 p                                      0.54 F                                      0.90 UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN                        2.78       1.48 M cold, DESIGN                      3.70       2.48 ho, DESIGN                    1,172.18   1,386.96 ho, ACTUAL                    1,089.98   1,389.78 hi, DESIGN                    1,013.34   2,159.37 hi, ACTUAL                      807.61   2,159.37 U, ACTUAL                        186.19     368.36 UA, ACTUAL                         4.12       1.57 Page 58 of 64
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 58 of 64
LOOP & Loss of Train A Shutdown Unit Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 4.12 1.57 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,025.23 2.46 1.48 61.23 61.92 5,679.60 5,000.00 2.79 2.48 1.22 1.47  
-0.63  
-1.25 89.27 89.27 85 105 117 141 105 156 141 216 32 36 36 60 0.60 0.54 0.90 2.78 1.48 3.70 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,089.98 1,389.78 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,159.37 186.19 368.36 UA F
m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)
M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R
S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)
T2 (deg. F)
T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)
HX CORRECTION FACTOR r
p F
UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 4.12 1.57  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request The respective UAs are 3.35 apportioned by flow and 2.64 apportioned by heat load. A UA of 3.17 was used in the analysis.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 59 of 64
The respective UAs are 3.35 apportioned by flow and 2.64 apportioned by heat load. A UA of 3.17 was used in the analysis.
A sensitivity run for Unit 2 by Westinghouse showed that a change in UA from 3.17 to 2.00 using an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger resulted in an increase in containment pressure from 11.73 to 11.76 psig; therefore, the use of any of the three values (3.35, 3.17, or 2.64) will produce nearly identical containment pressures. Therefore, the containment design conditions are not exceeded for the two or three pump ERCW cases.
A sensitivity run for Unit 2 by Westinghouse showed that a change in UA from 3.17 to 2.00 using an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger resulted in an increase in containment pressure from 11.73 to 11.76 psig; therefore, the use of any of the three values (3.35, 3.17, or 2.64) will produce nearly identical containment pressures. Therefore, the containment design conditions are not exceeded for the two or three pump ERCW cases.
CCW HX UA                                           3.17                 2.00 spray=       20,032 BTU/sec         20,047 BTU/sec At 2718 sec Spray Recirc RHR=         10,253 BTU/sec         9,262 BTU/sec spray=       19,551 BTU/sec         19,641 BTU/sec At 3600 sec RHR Spray Start RHR=           9,128 BTU/sec         8,347 BTU/sec Unit 1 W-COBRA/TRAC (Lotic 1) Results A similar analysis was run on Unit 1 with a UA of 2.00 and an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger. There is no impact to the peak calculated pressure using the new approved W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies when the CCW HX UA is reduced to 2.0. The change in heat rates at the time of spray initiation is shown in the table below.
CCW HX UA 3.17 2.00 At 2718 sec Spray Recirc spray=
CCW HX UA                                         3.17                 2.00 spray=       22,798 BTU/sec         22,798 BTU/sec At 2718 sec Spray Recirc RHR=         11,770 BTU/sec         10,612 BTU/sec There was no change in the spray heat removal rate and an approximately 10% reduction in the RHR heat removal rate. The RHR sprays are not credited in the analysis which uses W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies because the calculated pressure will either not exceed 9.5 psig, or will only remain above 9.5 psig for a duration less than 3600 seconds.
20,032 BTU/sec 20,047 BTU/sec RHR=
10,253 BTU/sec 9,262 BTU/sec At 3600 sec RHR Spray Start spray=
19,551 BTU/sec 19,641 BTU/sec RHR=
9,128 BTU/sec 8,347 BTU/sec Unit 1 W-COBRA/TRAC (Lotic 1) Results A similar analysis was run on Unit 1 with a UA of 2.00 and an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger. There is no impact to the peak calculated pressure using the new approved W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies when the CCW HX UA is reduced to 2.0. The change in heat rates at the time of spray initiation is shown in the table below.
CCW HX UA 3.17 2.00 At 2718 sec Spray Recirc spray=
22,798 BTU/sec 22,798 BTU/sec RHR=
11,770 BTU/sec 10,612 BTU/sec There was no change in the spray heat removal rate and an approximately 10% reduction in the RHR heat removal rate. The RHR sprays are not credited in the analysis which uses W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies because the calculated pressure will either not exceed 9.5 psig, or will only remain above 9.5 psig for a duration less than 3600 seconds.
Therefore, similarly on U1 the containment design is not challenged and the results are acceptable for two or three ERCW pump cases.
Therefore, similarly on U1 the containment design is not challenged and the results are acceptable for two or three ERCW pump cases.
Page 59 of 64


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Procedure                                 Type                                                       Description 0-SI-82.01, Diesel Generator (DG) 1A-A       System Operating Instructions        Contains a check of switch position in the diesel standby alignment. This is 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B                                             performed after each surveillance run, the most frequent of which is monthly. In 0-SI-82.03, Diesel Generator (DG) 2A-A                                             addition, this check is performed upon return to service of the DG following any 0-SI-82.04, Diesel Generator (DG) 2B-B                                             maintenance activities.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 60 of 64
1/2-GO-4, Normal Power Operation             General Operating Instructions      Contains direction to commence alignments (GO-4 and GO-5).
Procedure Type Description 0-SI-82.01, Diesel Generator (DG) 1A-A 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B 0-SI-82.03, Diesel Generator (DG) 2A-A 0-SI-82.04, Diesel Generator (DG) 2B-B System Operating Instructions Contains a check of switch position in the diesel standby alignment. This is performed after each surveillance run, the most frequent of which is monthly. In addition, this check is performed upon return to service of the DG following any maintenance activities.
1/2-GO-5, Unit Shutdown from 30%
1/2-GO-4, Normal Power Operation 1/2-GO-5, Unit Shutdown from 30%
1/2-GO-6, Unit Shutdown from HS to CSD                                             Contains direction to ensure alignments are complete prior to entering Mode 4 in GO-6.
1/2-GO-6, Unit Shutdown from HS to CSD General Operating Instructions Contains direction to commence alignments (GO-4 and GO-5).
1/2-E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant Emergency Operating Instructions     Contains direction to place in operation the equipment needed following a LOCA.
Contains direction to ensure alignments are complete prior to entering Mode 4 in GO-6.
Page 60 of 64
1/2-E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant Emergency Operating Instructions Contains direction to place in operation the equipment needed following a LOCA.  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request MCR ANNUNCIATOR - ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK HANDSWITCH IN BYPASS Page 61 of 64
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 61 of 64
MCR ANNUNCIATOR - ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK HANDSWITCH IN BYPASS  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK BYPASS SWITCH EXAMPLE Page 62 of 64
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 62 of 64
ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK BYPASS SWITCH EXAMPLE  


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Updated June 17, 2015 letter, Enclosure 1, Table 3 Summary of Steady-State DG Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (0 mins to end)
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 63 of 64
Pumps              U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /      U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /        U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /  U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /
Loss of Train A              Loss of Train A                Loss of Train B          Loss of Train B DG                1A    2A    1B    2B      1A    2A    1B      2B      1A        2A    1B  2B 1A      2A    1B  2B ERCW                            805    1610                  1610    805      805      1610          1610    805 CCS                              378    720                    378    720      720*** 378              720*** 378 AFW (motor-                      400*  **                    **      400*    400*      **            **      400*
driven)
Containment                      596                                  596      596                              596 Spray Centrifugal                      695    532                    532    695      695      532            532      695 Charging SI                              460                                  460      460                              460 RHR                              440    370                    370    440      440      370            370      440 Total / Large                    3774  3232                  2890    4116    4116      2890          3232    3774 Motor Load (HP)
Pressurizer                            500                    500                        500            500 Heaters (kW)
DG Loading ****
0 - 20 minutes kW                              4182  4261                  4188    4283    4004      4174          3984    4165 kVA                              4851  4797                  4745    4930    4622      4684          4492    4781 20 min - 2 hours kW                              4218  4015                  3941    4313    4040      3927          3738    4201 kVA                              4887  4514                  4462    4960    4658      4401          4209    4818 2 hours - End kW                              4067  4015                  3941    4163    4148      3927          4015    4033 kVA                              4688  4514                  4462    4766    4769      4401          4513    4625 Page 63 of 64


Updated {{letter dated|date=June 17, 2015|text=June 17, 2015 letter}}, Enclosure 1, Table 3 Summary of Steady-State DG Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (0 mins to end)
Pumps U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /
Loss of Train A U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /
Loss of Train A U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /
Loss of Train B U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /
Loss of Train B DG 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B ERCW 805 1610 1610 805 805 1610 1610 805 CCS 378 720 378 720 720***
378 720***
378 AFW (motor-driven) 400*
400*
400*
400*
Containment Spray 596 596 596 596 Centrifugal Charging 695 532 532 695 695 532 532 695 SI 460 460 460 460 RHR 440 370 370 440 440 370 370 440 Total / Large Motor Load (HP) 3774 3232 2890 4116 4116 2890 3232 3774 Pressurizer Heaters (kW) 500 500 500 500 DG Loading ****
0 - 20 minutes kW 4182 4261 4188 4283 4004 4174 3984 4165 kVA 4851 4797 4745 4930 4622 4684 4492 4781 20 min - 2 hours kW 4218 4015 3941 4313 4040 3927 3738 4201 kVA 4887 4514 4462 4960 4658 4401 4209 4818 2 hours - End kW 4067 4015 3941 4163 4148 3927 4015 4033 kVA 4688 4514 4462 4766 4769 4401 4513 4625


ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Note: Refer to Table 1 for CCS and ERCW pump power alignments.
ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 64 of 64
* 0 Min - 2 Hrs 600 hp until SGs refilled; thereafter 400 hp (for both LBLOCA and SBLOCA).

** 0 Min - 20 minutes 300 hp; then stopped
Note: Refer to Table 1 for CCS and ERCW pump power alignments.
*** 378 hp until CCS Pump C-S is manually aligned after 2 hours for spent fuel pool cooling; then 720 hp (360hp each for CCSP 1A and C-S)
* 0 Min - 2 Hrs 600 hp until SGs refilled; thereafter 400 hp (for both LBLOCA and SBLOCA).  
**** Values extracted from Appendix N-1, Pages 1 thru 4 of Diesel Loading Calculation, EDQ00099920080014 R31.
** 0 Min - 20 minutes 300 hp; then stopped  
Page 64 of 64
*** 378 hp until CCS Pump C-S is manually aligned after 2 hours for spent fuel pool cooling; then 720 hp (360hp each for CCSP 1A and C-S)  
}}
**** Values extracted from Appendix N-1, Pages 1 thru 4 of Diesel Loading Calculation, EDQ00099920080014 R31.}}

Latest revision as of 08:58, 10 January 2025

Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request
ML15243A044
Person / Time
Site: Watts Bar Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 08/28/2015
From: James Shea
Tennessee Valley Authority
To:
Document Control Desk, Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
CNL-15-170
Download: ML15243A044 (67)


Text

Tennessee Valley Authority, 1101 Market Street, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37402 CNL-15-170 August 28, 2015 10 CFR 50.90 U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission ATTN: Document Control Desk Washington, D.C. 20555-0001 Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Facility Operating License No. NFP-90 NRC Docket No. 50-390

Subject:

Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request

References:

1. Letter from TVA to NRC, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 - Application to Revise Technical Specifications for Component Cooling Water and Essential Raw Cooling Water to Support Dual Unit Operation (TS-WBN-15-13), dated June 17, 2015 [ML15170A474]
2. Email from NRC to TVA, Preliminary Draft RAIs Associated with Proposed WBN 1 ERCW and CCS Technical Specifications LAR, dated July 2, 2015
3. Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual-Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]
4. Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015 [ML15197A357]

By letter dated June 17, 2015, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By letter dated July 9, 2015, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By letter dated July 14, 2015 (Reference 4),

TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 2 August 28, 2015 Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.

During the audit, the NRC and TVA discussed numerous questions related to the LAR.

The enclosure provides the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions. As a result of the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions, changes are required to TS 3.7.16, TS 3.7.17, and the associated Bases. To address the NRC concern regarding the availability of Reactor Coolant System loops within the initial seven hours after reactor shut down, a change to additional TSs may be required. In addition, the enclosure includes wording additions for Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapters 6, 9 and 10 to clarify ice bed sublimation assumptions and water sources available to the AFW System. The proposed changes to the TS will be submitted in a license amendment request by September 11, 2015. The FSAR changes will be incorporated in WBN Unit 2 FSAR Amendment 114.

Consistent with the standards set forth in Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR) 50.92(c), TVA has determined that the responses, as provided in this letter, do not affect the no significant hazards considerations associated with the proposed license amendment to add TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 previously provided in Reference 1. TVA has further determined that the proposed amendment still qualifies for a categorical exclusion from environmental review pursuant to the provisions of 10 CFR 51.22(c)(9). Additionally, in accordance with 10 CFR 50.91(b)(1), TVA is sending a copy of this letter and the enclosure to the Tennessee Department of Environment and Conservation.

There are no new regulatory commitments associated with this letter. Please direct any questions concerning this matter to Gordon Arent at (423) 365-2004.

I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on the 28th day of August 2015.

Respectfully, J. W. Shea Vice President, Nuclear Licensing Enclosure cc: See Page 3 J. W. Shea Digitally signed by J. W. Shea DN: cn=J. W. Shea, o=Tennessee Valley Authority, ou=Nuclear Licensing, email=jwshea@tva.gov, c=US Date: 2015.08.28 22:26:28 -04'00'

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-15-170 Page 3 August 28, 2015

Enclosure:

Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request cc (Enclosure):

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Region II NRC Senior Resident Inspector - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 NRC Project Manager - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Director - Division of Radiological Health - Tennessee State Department of Environment and Conservation

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 1 of 64

Background

By letter dated June 17, 2015, Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for a change to Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1 (Reference 1). The proposed change would create new Technical Specifications (TS) 3.7.16, Component Cooling System (CCS) - Shutdown, and TS 3.7.17, Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System - Shutdown, to support dual unit operation of WBN Units 1 and 2. By email dated July 2, 2015, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) provided requests for additional information (RAI) on the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 2). By letter dated July 9, 2015, the NRC requested supplemental information associated with the proposed WBN Unit 1 license amendment (Reference 3). By letter dated July 14, 2015 (Reference 4),

TVA submitted the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC acceptance review questions, including proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.

Following submittal of the requested supplemental information and responses to the NRC RAIs, the NRC indicated that sufficient information was provided by TVA to support the NRC review of the proposed license amendment request (LAR). However, to facilitate a more efficient and timely interaction between the NRC and TVA, the NRC decided to perform an audit of the proposed LAR in the NRC White Flint offices located in Rockville, MD during the weeks of July 27 to July 31, 2015, August 3 to August 7, 2015, and August 25 to August 28, 2015.

During the audit, the NRC and TVA discussed numerous questions related to the LAR.

This enclosure provides the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions. As a result of the TVA responses to the NRC audit review questions, changes are required to TS 3.7.16, TS 3.7.17, and the associated Bases. To address the NRC concern regarding the availability of Reactor Coolant System loops within the initial seven hours after reactor shut down, a change to additional TSs may be required. In addition, this enclosure includes wording additions for Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapters 6, 9 and 10 to clarify ice bed sublimation assumptions and water sources available to the AFW System. The proposed changes to the TS will be submitted in a license amendment request by September 11, 2015. The FSAR changes will be incorporated in WBN Unit 2 FSAR Amendment 114.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 2 of 64

References

1.

Letter from TVA to NRC, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 - Application to Revise Technical Specifications for Component Cooling Water and Essential Raw Cooling Water to Support Dual Unit Operation (TS-WBN-15-13), dated June 17, 2015

[ML15170A474]

2.

Email from NRC to TVA, Preliminary Draft RAIs Associated with Proposed WBN 1 ERCW and CCS Technical Specifications LAR, dated July 2, 2015

3.

Letter from NRC to TVA, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Supplemental Information Needed for Acceptance of Requested Licensing Action Regarding Application to Add Technical Specifications to Support Dual Unit Operations (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 9, 2015 [ML15187A403]

4.

Letter from TVA to NRC, Responses to NRC Acceptance Review Questions for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 1 Essential Raw Cooling Water and Component Cooling Water System License Amendment Request (TAC No. MF6376), dated July 14, 2015

[ML15197A357]

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 3 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

1.

BOP - 1 TS 3.0.4 does not allow Mode changes when applicable LCOs for that Mode are not met. The problem with possible Mode change from 4 to 3 after shutdown is that equipment may have been taken out of service that is required to meet the LCOs of TS that are required for Mode 3. A similar statement can be made for a Mode change from 5 to 4. The proposed TS make no provision for suspending or stopping the process of making more equipment inoperable that otherwise would be required to support Mode change, if the proposed LCO is not met. Explain why the proposed TSs do not include an Action to stop making more equipment inoperable that would be required for the Mode change when the proposed TS LCOs are not met, or make provisions to correct the issues.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 With one Component Cooling Water System (CCS) or Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW) System train inoperable, a loss of redundancy has occurred. However, the capability to mitigate an accident in one unit and cooldown the other unit (or maintain the other unit in a cooldown condition) is maintained by the remaining operable CCS and ERCW trains. Therefore, a Mode change from 5 to 4 or from 4 to 3 is not anticipated.

During a normal shutdown, decay heat removal is via the reactor coolant system (RCS) loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to Residual Heat Removal (RHR) System entry conditions (Tcold < 350ºF). Therefore, as LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become Applicable (entry into Mode 4), the RCS loops are still operable. At this point, LCO 3.7.16 requires an additional CCS Train B pump powered from and aligned to the CCS Train B header, and LCO 3.7.17 requires one additional ERCW pump be capable of being powered from and aligned to each ERCW train. However, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6, RCS-Loops - MODE 4, is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.

If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional methods available to remove decay heat (i.e., RCS loops). However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent loss of coolant accident (LOCA) in the other unit.

Therefore, it is unnecessary for TS to provide provisions for suspending or stopping the process of making more equipment inoperable.

2.

BOP - 2 TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 have provision to enter LCO 3.4.6 with one train inoperable because ERCW and CCS are support systems for decay heat removal. Otherwise TS 3.0.6 could allow LCO 3.4.6 to not be entered. Standard TS are similarly worded.

It appears that proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 actions for one train inoperable should similarly have provisions for entering TS 3.4.6. TS 3.4.6 would lead to different action than what TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 The Actions of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are predicated on the preference to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS loops operable in addition to the remaining operable RHR loop. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br />. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 4 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted currently propose for 1 loop inoperable. Explain why the proposed TS differ from 3.7.7 and 3.7.8 in this respect, or correct the issue.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 require the unit to be placed in MODE 5; Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.

3.

BOP - 3 TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 have required action to verify Tavg > 200 F. But the bases for TS 3.4.6 says with one RHR train available, it would be safer to be in Mode 5 because if the remaining train of decay heat was lost, the loss would occur at a lower temperature. Explain this difference between TS 3.4.6 and proposed TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350ºF). As LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.

If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred, given the additional methods available to remove decay heat. This action precludes entry into the LCO 3.4.6 Actions, as LCO 3.4.6 is met with two operable RCS loops and one RCS loop in operation. However, if it is necessary to place the unit in Mode 5 to comply with TS Required Actions, LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

If the Action to verify two RCS loops operable and one RCS loop in operation cannot be met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br />. With one ERCW train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in MODE 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in MODE 5 in 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

These Actions are conservative to the Required Actions of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are two operable RCS loops, and are consistent with the requirements of LCO 3.7.7, LCO 3.7.8, and LCO 3.4.6 when there are no operable RCS loops and one inoperable RHR loop.

4.

BOP - 4 TS 3.7.8 for ERCW has a provision for entering TS 3.8.1 for emergency diesel generators made LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 provide requirements in addition to those of LCO 3.7.7 and LCO 3.7.8. However, the additional requirements of LCO 3.7.17 are not required for DG operability. There is sufficient flow to the diesel generators (DGs) from ERCW without a third ERCW pump in each train to support DG Operability. Although the requirements of

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 5 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted inoperable by ERCW when one ERCW loop is inoperable. Discuss why TS 3.7.17 does not have the same provision.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 LCO 3.7.17 may not be met (i.e., a third pump capable of being aligned to each ERCW Train) the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are still met. If the requirements of LCO 3.7.8 are not met, the Actions of LCO 3.7.8 include the requirement to enter the Conditions and Required Actions of LCO 3.8.1 for DGs made inoperable by ERCW.

5.

BOP - 5 TS 3.7.17 has a Note for LCO 3.0.3 to suspend Mode change. For a scenario of two ERCW trains inoperable per TS 3.7.17, but at least one ERCW train operable per TS 3.7.8, provide discussion and justification why it is safer to stay in Mode 4 and not continue cooldown to Mode 5 for this TS condition.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 With two ERCW trains inoperable for LCO 3.7.17, there may be insufficient ERCW flow available to place the non-accident unit in Mode 5 during the mitigation of a LOCA on the other unit. Otherwise, the preference is to maintain the unit in a condition with multiple methods of decay heat removal available, i.e., maintain the unit in Mode 4 with two RCS loops operable.

6.

BOP - 6 In TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 for one train inoperable, the TS Actions make a distinction between a normal shutdown and a TS required shutdown. Explain the distinction in shutdown requirements between a normal shutdown and a TS required shutdown for TS 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 Date Posted: 07/31/15 Similar to the response to Question #2, decay heat removal is via the RCS loops until sometime after the unit has been cooled down to RHR entry conditions (Tcold < 350ºF). As LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 become applicable, the requirement of LCO 3.4.6 is still being met by the two operable RCS loops.

If the requirements of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 are not met, Condition B requires that the unit be maintained in Mode 4 (with decay heat removal from the RCS loops).

Maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with additional methods of decay heat removal available minimizes the likelihood of a situation where the decay heat and residual heat of the unit exceeds the capability of the available RHR loop resulting in the possibility of an unintentional Mode change. If the Required Actions and Completion Times of Condition B are not met, no actions are specified. Therefore, LCO 3.0.3 applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br />. With one CCS train inoperable and Required Actions require the unit to be placed in Mode 5, Condition A applies, requiring the unit to be placed in Mode 5 in 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

If TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 6 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

7.

BOP - 7 TVA has made a general statement that there is adequate clean water on site to support a 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> cooldown with aux feedwater since:

x Unit 1 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 requires 200,000 gallons) x Unit 2 CST @ 395,000 gallons (TS SR 3.7.6.1 (Rev J) requires 200,000 gallons) x Demin tank @ 500,000 gallons x

Aux feedwater storage tank @ 500,000 gallons (added for FLEX mitigating strategies)

TVAs response in the supplement included appeared to credit cross-tie between the Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs as well as reliance on water stored in the FLEX tank. It is not clear how these clean water sources are currently identified and credited within the licensing basis to support normal hot standby cooling functions, as this does not appear to be described in the FSAR, and other licensing basis related references, as noted below:

From Watts Bar FSAR:

9.2.6.3 The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.

10.4.9.2 Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except in emergencies when the condensate supply is unavailable.

See responses to BOP-10 and BOP-11.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 7 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted From SE in NUREG 0847, Supp 23 (June 2011):

TVA's proposed clarification to the FSAR is acceptable to the NRC staff. Because the CSTs are credited only for the SBO event under 10 CFR 50.63, and TVA does not plan to share CSTs between the units during plant operation, the staff concludes that TVA satisfies GDC 5 regarding the CSTs. Confirmation by the staff of TVA's change to FSAR Section 10.4.9 to reflect TVA's intention to operate with each CST isolated from the other is Open Item 62 (Appendix HH).

Date Posted: 07/31/15

8.

BOP - 8 Because the AFW takeoff is at the end of the ERCW system, after heat removal from the safety related heat exchangers, confirm ERCW to AFW will still be at the assumed maximum allowable temperature to satisfy Chapter 15 requirements (80-120°F).

Date Posted: 07/31/15 TVA notes the AFW inlet temperatures are affected by the component cooling heat exchangers and the containment spray heat exchangers as well as miscellaneous loads.

The component cooling heat exchanger analysis demonstrates that ERCW discharge temperature may exceed 120ºF but these are cases where AFW is not required. However, an examination of the containment spray heat exchanger discharge layout with respect to AFW suction indicates cases where AFW could exceed 120ºF when AFW is required.

The following arrangements are noted:

x Motor driven AFW 1A-A/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.

x Motor driven AFW 1B-B/TDAFW 1A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.

x Motor driven AFW 2A-A/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 1A but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 2A.

x Motor driven AFW 2B-B/TDAFW 2A-S is upstream of CCS heat exchanger 2B but downstream of CCS heat exchanger 1B.

If a LOCA was postulated in unit 1:

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 8 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted x

MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 120ºF and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 120ºF.

x MDAFW 1B-B would be bounded by 130ºF and MDAFW 2B-B would be bounded by 130ºF.

If a LOCA was postulated in unit 2:

x MDAFW 1A-A would be bounded by 130ºF and MDAFW 2A-A would be bounded by 130ºF.

x MDAFW 1B-B would be bounded by 120ºF and MDAFW 2B-B would be bounded by 120ºF.

Therefore, there are four cases where the AFW inlet temperature might exceed 120ºF.

Impacts would be as follows:

LBLOCA The large break LOCA is described in FSAR Section 15.4. For the case where the AFW is on the same unit as the large break LOCA (U1/MDAFW 1B-B and U2/MDAFW 2A-A) the AFW is only used to initially fill the steam generators. The large break LOCA does not credit the continued use of AFW. This filling would occur prior to switchover to containment spray recirculation and therefore would happen prior to the temperature reaching 130ºF at the discharge of the containment spray heat exchanger. The large break LOCA peak clad temperature and the containment peak pressure analysis would not be impacted.

For the case where the large break LOCA was in the opposite unit (U1/MDAFW 2B-B and U2/MDAFW 1A-A), the AFW would be used to shutdown the non-LOCA unit and may be at a higher ERCW discharge temperature. This would result in slightly warmer water for unit shutdown and would have no deleterious effect on the non-LOCA unit.

SBLOCA The small break LOCA is described in FSAR Section 15.3. Unlike the large break LOCA, the small LOCA credits the continued use of AFW for cooling the LOCA unit. Break sizes for small LOCAs examined in the FSAR range from 2 inches to over 8 inches in diameter.

It can be observed from FSAR Table 15.3-2 and supporting calculations that for all but the smallest break size, the transient has peaked prior to switchover to the containment sump recirculation and therefore would not be impacted. The smallest break peaks later in the

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 9 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted transient but at a much lower peak clad temperature. Because the only impact of the higher AFW temperature is a slightly increased enthalpy for the liquid entering the generator and because the majority of the energy is removed by vaporization (inlet enthalpy of 81 Btu/lb versus 91 Btu/lb for AFW compared to steam at approximately 1183 Btu/lb), a less than 1% change in enthalpy would be insignificant to the smallest LOCA.

The smallest LOCA peaks at 1009ºF for Unit 2 with considerable margin to the limiting peak clad temperature of 2200ºF and margin to the limiting small break LOCA peak clad temperature of 1183.9ºF.

NPSH A NPSH analysis indicates AFW will perform acceptably at 130ºF with NPSH margin.

Condition Report (CR) 1072659 has been initiated to document this issue. A copy of the CR has been uploaded to the Sharepoint Site. The AFW system description, FSAR, and associated calculations will be revised to note cases where the AFW maximum temperature of 120ºF may be exceeded.

9.

BOP - 9 Describe the ERCW and CCS analysis as it pertains to a LOCA in one unit while in MODE 4 and a controlled shutdown of the other Unit as it enters MODE 4 or 5.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 When the opposite unit has been shutdown for a period of time, the additional CCS and ERCW pump requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 are not required to ensure adequate decay heat removal by the RHR System. However, there may be some scenarios when the opposite unit has been shutdown for greater than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> that the heat removal capacity of the RHR System is insufficient without the CCS and ERCW System requirements of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 being applicable.

Therefore, TVA will remove Applicability Note b, so that the Applicability of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 in Modes 4 and 5 is dependent on whether the associated unit has been shutdown for less than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />.

This response supersedes the response provided to Acceptance Review Question #2 provided in TVA letter dated July 14, 2015.

The following events are required to be supported by the CCS and ERCW configurations proposed in TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.

The CCS shall be designed to remove heat from potentially or normally radioactive heat loads during any mode of normal operation, and incidents of moderate frequency. In addition, the CCS shall be designed to remove heat from the RHR HXs and various pump

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 10 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted seal and/or lube oil coolers during infrequent incidents, and limiting faults. The CCS is required to mitigate the consequences of Design Basis Events (DBEs). The required DBEs and associated safety functions for the CCS are in WB-DC-40-64.

EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT CCS Fire Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of The Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal At Power

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 11 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Single RCCA Withdrawal At Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)

Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations The ERCW System is required to mitigate the consequences of plant Design Basis Events described in WB-DC-40-64. It performs a Primary Safety Function by providing cooling and makeup for essential safety-related plant equipment and components in response to adverse plant operating conditions which impose safety-related performance requirements on the systems being served.

EVENTS IN WB-DC-40-64 THAT CREDIT ERCW Fire Design Basis Flood Operating Basis Earthquake Safe Shutdown Earthquake Tornado Combustible Gases Inside Containment Control Room Evacuation Internally Generated Missiles General High Energy Line Break Heavy Load Drop Small Break LOCA Large Break LOCA Steam Generator Tube Rupture Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing Waste Gas Decay Tank Rupture Fuel Handling Accident Loss of External Electrical Load and/or Turbine Trip Loss of Offsite Power Main Steam Line Break

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 12 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Main Feedwater Line Rupture Event Accidental Depressurization of Main Steam System Loss of Normal Feedwater Excess Heat Removal Due to Feedwater System Malfunction Moderate Energy Line Break Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor or Shaft Break Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow Excessive Load Increase Incident Accidental Depressurization of the Reactor Coolant System Inadvertent Safety Injection Operation - Power Operation Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical or Hot Zero Power Condition Uncontrolled RCCA Bank Withdrawal at Power Single RCCA Withdrawal at Full Power RCCA Misalignment Uncontrolled Boron Dilution Improper Fuel Assembly Loading Anticipated Transient Without Scram Failure of Nonsafety-Related Control Systems as an Initiating Event Minor Secondary System Pipe Breaks Loss of All AC Power (Station Blackout)

Loss of RHR During Mid-Loop Operations

10.

BOP - 10 Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -

letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the steam generators for at least 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> as one of the options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to address the use of available and approved clean water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance with the approved licensing basis.

From the TVA response:

a. ERCW is the safety-related source of water to AFW. Whenever the steam generators are relied on for heat removal, the switchover from the CST to ERCW is required to be operable.
b. TVA considers the current Applicability of LCO 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Item 6.f, Auxiliary Feedwater Pumps Train A and B Suction Transfer on Suction Pressure - Low, appropriate as written.

TVA will develop a TRM to control this function while a change is being evaluated for a generic approach with PWROG. Procedure guidance will be provided in the cooldown procedure (GO-6).

Draft TRM has been posted to SharePoint site.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 13 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The safety-related water supply for AFW is ERCW.

The AFW suction source automatically switches from the CST to ERCW when a low pressure condition exists in the AFW pump suction piping from the CST.

The switchover to ERCW will occur whenever AFW is in service to assure heat removal through the steam generators if the low pressure condition exists. This assures the safety function of decay heat removal is accomplished.

TS Table 3.3.2-1, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System Instrumentation. Item 6.f describes the auxiliary feedwater pump suction transfer on suction low. The applicable Mode for this item is Modes 1, 2, 3.

TS 3.7.5, Auxiliary feedwater system, applicable is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.

TS 3.7.6 Condensate storage tank, applicability is Modes 1, 2, and 3 plus Mode 4 when steam generator is relied upon for heat removal.

BTS 3.7.6 states that as the preferred water source to satisfy accident analysis assumptions, the CST must contain sufficient cooling water to remove decay heat for 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> following a reactor trip from 100.6% RTP, and then to cool down the RCS to RHR entry conditions, assuming a coincident loss of offsite power and the most adverse single failure. In doing this, it must retain sufficient water to ensure adequate net positive suction head for the AFW pumps during cooldown, as well as account for any losses from the steam driven AFW pump turbine, or before isolating

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 14 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted AFW to a broken line. The CST level required is equivalent to a usable volume of 200,000 gallons, which is based on holding the unit in MODE 3 for 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, followed by a cooldown to RHR entry conditions at 50 F/hour. This basis is established in Reference 4 and exceeds the volume required by the accident analysis.

UFSAR 9.2.6.3, Safety Evaluation, states that the condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water.

The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b). Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater can be obtained from both tanks. The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during an extreme emergency when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.

NRC Questions:

a. Since the Unit 1 CST water is limited in volume to support operations beyond 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br /> and the proposed changes state that AFW operations is now needed for operations out to 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, describe the bases for the CST to ERCW automatic switchover to support Mode 4 operations.
b. Based on the response to part a, describe the necessary changes to the UFSAR, TS, and TS Bases.

Date Posted: 08/03/15

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 15 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

11.

BOP - 11 Follow-up to NRC acceptance review Question 3 -

letter date July 14, 2015. The summary of that question was related to maintaining in Mode 3 or Mode 4 with decay heat being removed through the steam generators for at least 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> as one of the options for managing a unit shutdown and for TVA to address the use of available and approved clean water sources, ERCW, and the CST in accordance with the approved licensing basis.

From the TVA response:

There is adequate clean water to support a unit being maintained on AFW for 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. The capacity of each of the two CSTs is 395,000 gallons and the normal maximum volume in the CSTs is approximately 385,000 gallons. Review of operational data for the past five years shows that the WBN Unit 1 CST has been maintained at approximately 330,000 gallons. Because AFW is not the only system that uses CST water, a standpipe is provided in the tank to assure that a minimum of 200,000 gallons of water is available for the sole use of AFW.

Thus, the site maintains approximately 130,000 gallons of water in the CST above the TS limit.

Normal make-up to the CST comes from the Demineralized Water Storage (DWST) Tank and the Make-up Water Treatment Plant (MWTP). The DWST tank has a capacity of 500,000 gallons and the level has historically been maintained between 65 and 90 percent full. There have been instances, including one earlier this year, where WBN Unit 1 was maintained in Mode 3 for more than two days using the DWST and the MWTP.

a. The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) is sized to provide seven hours of clean water (200,000 gallons). This assumes maintaining operation in Mode 3 for two hours and then cooling down for five hours at 50 degrees per hour. At seven hours post trip, the required amount for AFW flow is 175 gpm. An extrapolation of this amount for the remaining 41 hours4.74537e-4 days <br />0.0114 hours <br />6.779101e-5 weeks <br />1.56005e-5 months <br /> would result in the conclusion that approximately 430,500 gallons of clean water would be required to feed AFW.

This estimate is very conservative in that maintaining a stable level requires much less water than cooling down and also in the fact that this level does not account for the slow decay of AFW flow required over the period. As an example, at the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> point, only approximately 110 gpm is required to satisfy the AFW demand.

b. Normal makeup to the CST is provided from vendor operated equipment. Clean water is produced and added to the Demineralized Water Storage Tank (DWST). The capacity of the normal makeup system is sufficient to maintain CST inventory for extended continued operation in Mode 3 or 4.

As an actual example, in 2014, WBN was maintained in Mode 3 for the period from July 13 at 1937 to July 15 at 0503. During the first 27 hours3.125e-4 days <br />0.0075 hours <br />4.464286e-5 weeks <br />1.02735e-5 months <br />, the normal makeup system to the CST maintained CST level at the normal level of 325,000 gallons while supplying the required AFW flow in Mode 3. The level did decrease during the final five hours of Mode 3 operation, but this decrease was due to increased water usage associated with feed and bleed on the condensate system to establish secondary parameters to support plant startup.

Thus, for a normal extended operation in Mode 4, such as one in which the plant cannot continue into Mode 5 due to inability to establish the required CCS and ERCW alignments to support entry into Mode 5, the normal DWST makeup to the CST will be used to replenish the CST inventory with clean water.

Should augmentation to the normal DWST makeup method be required, another historical example is provided. On February 23, 2012 at 0235, it was discovered that the normal makeup source was lost, forcing the site to bring in portable equipment to replenish the CSTs. The equipment was in place and operating on the same day at 2105 or approximately 18.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> following the loss. The portable trailers are capable of providing 200 gpm to the CST. The procedure 0-SOI-59.01 Section 8.4, provides

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 16 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted WBN recently added the Auxiliary Feedwater Storage Tank (AFWST) as part of the FLEX mitigating strategies. This tank has a capacity of 500,000 gallons and is an immediately available source of clean water. The tank was designed to be seismically robust and to withstand the effects of tornados. The AFWST supply piping is normally isolated by air operated valves (AOVs) from the Unit 1 and Unit 2 condensate piping that supply the suction for the AFW pumps. The AOVs open on a low pressure signal from the upstream condensate piping, a loss of AC power, or a loss of control air.

Water can be transferred from the DWST to the AFWST using hoses and pumps that are maintained by the FLEX program if power cannot be provided to the DWST booster pumps. The two CSTs have a cross tie that when opened provides an additional approximately 330,000 gallons of clean water for the case of a LOCA on one unit and the other unit being shutdown.

NRC Questions:

a. Provide the total expected water volumes of clean water to support operations of the AFW system for the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> durations.
b. Provide the procedure steps (alarm responses, AOPs, EOPs, etc) that direct operators to supplement the Unit 1 CST clean water supply from the new Flex tank, opposite units CST and DWST (in front of the ERCW automatic switchover).
c. Provide access to the design change package for the addition of the new Flex tank. This should include the 50.59 guidance for placing portable trailers in-service.

In all cases, the following guidance is provided in the Annunciator Response Instructions (ARI). The low level alarm for the CSTs comes in at 210,000 gallons. The response to this alarm is contained in procedure 1/2-ARI-36-42. Below is the wording associated with low level response for Unit 1. The Unit 2 instruction is identical with the exception of switching the designated tanks (A for B and B for A).

[3] IF level is low, THEN, REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6), and INITIATE makeup to CST A from one of the following sources as listed in preferred order:

[3.1] From CST B per SOI-2&3.01, CONDENSATE AND FEEDWATER SYSTEM

[3.2] From DI Water Storage Tank per SOI-59.01, DEMINERALIZED WATER SYSTEM.

Makeup from the opposite unit CST is specified as the first response, as the normal makeup to the CST is from the Demin Water System. Receipt of this alarm will not normally be expected if the normal method remains available as the capacity of the Demin makeup system exceeds the requirements for AFW flow.

The CST LoLo level alarm comes in at approximately 11,600 gallons. The actions specified for this alarm are.

[1] REDUCE demand from CST, if possible.

[2] MAKEUP to CST A at maximum possible rate.

[3] IF AFW Pumps are running, THEN MONITOR the following:

x AFW Storage Tank (AFWST) level decrease.

x AFW Pump Suction Valves for swap to ERCW Discharge Header suction.

[4] REFER TO Tech Specs (LCO 3.7.6).

These actions acknowledge that if continued AFW demand is required and adequate clean water makeup can not be established, the crew should ensure that the safety related supply to AFW (ERCW) properly aligns to supply AFW needs when required.

e. The following changes will be addressed in the FSAR.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 17 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted reviews performed, P&ID drawings, piping isometrics, piping safety classification and new AOVs logic.

d. Describe how the new Flex tank automatic switchover and ERCW automatic switchover interact.

Specifically, the set-point differences should be described.

e. Based on the response above, describe any necessary changes to the UFSAR, TS, and TS Bases based on this new required water volume.

Date Posted: 08/03/15 9.2.6.1 Design Bases The condensate storage facilities are designed to serve as a receiver of water from the main condenser high level dump and to provide treated water for makeup to the main condenser while reserving a minimum amount for the auxiliary feedwater system. This amount is required to hold the plant for two hours after a Design Basis Event (DBE) and 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> to cool RCS from no-load hot standby at 50°F per hour to the point at which the residual heat removal system can take over.

When the CSTs are intact and offsite power is available, the inventory available in the CSTs plus makeup from the make-up water plant and the demineralized water storage tank (FSAR Section 10.4), is capable of supplying clean water to support maintaining the plant on auxiliary feedwater for longer than seven hours without the need to transfer the AFW pump suction to ERCW. No credit is taken for this additional water in the design and safety evaluations of condensate storage or AFW.

The condensate storage tanks are not an engineered safety feature and are not seismically qualified. The supply from the make-up water tank and the demineralized water storage tank and associated piping are not engineered safety features and are not seismically qualified. The storage tanks supply the preferred source of water to the auxiliary feedwater system, but the engineered safety feature source is the ERCW System (Safety Class 2b).

9.2.6.3 Safety Evaluation The condensate storage tanks are the preferred source of clean water supply for the auxiliary feedwater pumps and a storage reservoir for secondary system water. The tanks are not an engineered safety feature. The engineered safety feature water source for the auxiliary feedwater system is the ERCW system (Safety Class 2b).

Either tank is isolable, but auxiliary feedwater for either unit can be obtained from both tanks. This will be done only if necessary since each condensate storage tank normally contains auxiliary feedwater for just one unit.

The ERCW system pool quality feedwater will be used during events when safety is the prime consideration and steam generator cleanliness is of secondary importance.

Piping connected to the condensate storage tanks is routed through a heated tunnel

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 18 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted under the tanks. Ice formation in the tanks during a period of prolonged low temperatures can be prevented, if necessary, by recirculation of water through the condensate transfer pump. The tank and its connecting piping can accommodate water whose temperature is in the range of 40°F to 130°F.

10.4.9.2 System Description The two reactor units have separate AFW systems, as shown in Figure 10.4-21.

Each system has two electric motor-driven pumps and one turbine-driven pump.

Each of the electric pumps serves two steam generators; the turbine pump serves all four. All three pumps supporting a unit automatically deliver rated flow within one minute upon a trip of both turbine-driven main feedwater pumps, loss of offsite power, an AMSAC signal, a safety injection signal or low-low steam generator water level. The motor driven pumps (MDPs) start on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any steam generator and the turbine driven pump starts on a two-out-of-three low-low level signal in any two steam generators. Each pump supplies sufficient water for evaporative heat removal to prevent operation of the primary system relief valves or the uncovering of the core. The operator has the capability to open an additional recirculation line on the MDPs when there is low decay heat required to be removed from the SG. These lines contain a normally closed valve that closes on an accident signal. The valve is operable after the accident signal, but if an additional accident signal occurs, the valve would be reclosed. This ensures that the forward flow requirements to remove decay heat have been satisfied. Significant pump design parameters are given in Table 10.4-1.

The preferred sources of water for all auxiliary feedwater pumps are the two 395,000 gallon condensate storage tanks. A minimum of 200,000 gallons in each tank is reserved for the AFW Systems by means of a standpipe through which other systems are supplied. The two CSTs are normally isolated from each other, with one CST dedicated to each unit. The AFW safety analyses take no credit for the ability to crosstie the CSTs. As an unlimited backup water supply for each unit, a separate ERCW system header feeds each motor-driven pump. The turbine-driven pump can receive backup water from either ERCW header. The ERCW supply is automatically (or remote-manually) initiated on a two-out-of-three low pressure signal in the AFW system suction lines. Pump protection during the automatic transfer to the ERCW supplies is assured by providing sufficient suction head and flow to the pumps and is

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 19 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted verified by system analysis. Since the ERCW system supplies poor quality water, it is not used except when the condensate supply is unavailable.

In addition, the high pressure fire protection (HPFP) system which is cross-connected to the discharge of each motor driven AFW pump can be aligned to supply unlimited raw water directly to the steam generators, in the unlikely event of a flood above plant grade. Water from the HPFP system is supplied by four high pressure, vertical turbine, motor-driven, Seismic Category I pumps conforming to the requirements of ASME B&PV Code Section III, Class 3 with each having a rating of 1590 gpm at 300 feet head. These pumps are installed in the Seismic Category I Intake Pumping Station with motors above the maximum possible flood level. Each pump is capable of supplying 100% of the auxiliary feedwater demands for both units during a flood above plant grade. The four pumps are supplied from normal and emergency power with two pumps assigned to each of the two emergency power trains. Each pair of pumps on the same power train takes suction from a common sump which receives water through a settling baffle arrangement for all normal, and flood reservoir levels.

Generated CR 1075753 to address interactions from a GDC-5 perspective for Unit 1 and Unit 2 CSTs and AFW storage tank. This CR has been posted to SharePoint.

12.

BOP-12 What controls are in place to revisit flow calculations to ensure assumed HX tube plugging and fouling factors reflect actual HX degradation or required plugging?

Tube plugging for the safety related heat exchangers are controlled by issued design output. These values may be found in the System Descriptions for System 70, Component Cooling System (5%), System 72, Containment Spray System (10%), and System 74, Residual Heat Removal System (5%).

TVAs system descriptions are design output under the 10 CFR 50 Appendix B, Quality Assurance Program.

13.

BOP - 13 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:

With the loss of Train A:

a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS C heat exchanger to mitigate a a)

CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train A:

Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)

RHR Heat Exchanger 54,800,000

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 20 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted design basis accident (loss of coolant accident with a loss of offsite power and failure of Train A)? And what is the corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal demand?

b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate required to be sent to the Containment Spray Heat Exchanger 1B or 2B?

c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the operating EDGs?

d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a heat sink for the spent fuel pools?

e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit?

Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 46,000 Radiation Monitor 0

Containment Spray Pump 14,746 Total 55,027,506 Train B ERCW Flows are NOT separated by unit. The total required Train B ERCW flow to the CCS HX C for one unit in LOCA-Recirculation and the other unit in Hot Shutdown for less than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> is provided below.

Item CCS Flow (gpm)

ERCW Flow to CCS HX C (gpm)

RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 9,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Radiation Monitor 6

Containment Spray Pump 2

Total 5,061 b)

For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c)

For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d)

CCS HX A: 1,370 gpm e)

Concurrent ERCW flow rates to other safety-related loads for LOCA unit:

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 21 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Item ERCW Flow (gpm)

Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common) 240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 560.0 Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor (Unit Common) 3.5 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common) 900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area Cooler (Unit Common) 60.0 AFW & Component Cooling System Area Cooler (Unit Common) 102.0 Emergency Gas Treatment System Room Cooler (Unit Common) 10.0 Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster Pumps Area Cooler (Unit Common) 29.0 Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler 28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler 22.0 Total 2,372.1

14.

BOP 1 Clarification Question The total CCS flow is stated to be 5061 GPM to each Spent fuel pool cooling is provided by the 1B-B CCS pump through the A CCS HX which is realigned later in the event. The flow for the spent fuel pool is therefore not included in the C CCS HX flow.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 22 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted unit in BOP-12 and BOP-13.

Is additional CCS flow to CCS HX A or B required for Spent Fuel Pool cooling and how much? What will then be the required total CCS flow from the CCS B Train when in the plant conditions described in BOP-12 and BOP-13?

TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br />.

15.

BOP - 14 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:

With a loss of Train A:

a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS C heat exchanger to maintain a unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit achieved Mode 4 in the minimum amount of time after shutdown? And what is the corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal?

b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit?

a)

CCS HX C peak heat removal rate for unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train A:

Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)

RHR HX 89,265,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 0

Containment Spray Pump 0

Radiation Monitor 0

Total 89,431,960 ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal:

Note: Even though certain non-accident unit pumps may not be running (no heat load), they may still receive CCS cooling water flow.

Item CCS Flow (gpm)

ERCW Flow to CCS HX C (gpm)

RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 9,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Radiation Monitor 6

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 23 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Containment Spray Pump 2

Total 5,061 b)

Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:

Item ERCW Flow (gpm)

ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*

46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*

612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*

248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*

220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load) 30.0 Total 1,266.8 These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.

During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.

16.

BOP 14 - 1 Please clarify the simultaneous validity of the following statements as submitted by TVA and respond to the following questions.

x Page E1-5 of the June 17, 2015, letter states that the RHR system is normally placed in service TVA will submit a license amendment request to maintain Auxiliary Feedwater capability in support of TS 3.4.6 Loops Operable requirements for 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br />.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 24 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted four hours after reactor shutdown.

x Page E1-4 of the July 14 submittal states that it will be approximately 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br /> before RHR is placed in service.

x TVA response to NRC Audit Review Questions BOP-14 states that the peak heat removal rate from the RHR heat Exchanger for a unit in Mode 4 with a loss of Train A is 89,265,200 BTU/hr.

A) Is 89,265,200 BTU/hr applicable to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> or 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br /> after shutdown of the non-accident unit?

B) With RHR in service 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after shutdown of the non-accident unit, how is removal of residual heat from the non-accident unit assured between hours 4 and 7 after shutdown?

17.

BOP - 15 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:

With a loss of Train B:

a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to mitigate a design basis accident (loss of coolant accident with a loss of offsite power and failure of Train B)? And what is the corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal demand?

b) What is the concurrent ERCW flow rate a)

CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate for mitigation of LOCA on one unit with loss of offsite power and loss of Train B:

Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)

RHR Heat Exchanger 54,800,000 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 46,000 Containment Spray Pump 14,746 Seal Water Heat Exchanger 941,000 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger

  • 0 Sample Heat Exchanger A 0

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 25 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted required to be sent to the Containment Spray Heat Exchanger 1A or 2A?

c) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the operating EDGs?

d) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the CCS heat exchanger A or B as a heat sink for the spent fuel pools?

e) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit?

Sample Heat Exchanger B 0

Sample Heat Exchanger C 0

Hot Sample Chiller Package 0

Radiation Monitor 0

Waste Gas Compressor 135,135 Total 56,103,641 There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.

Corresponding required ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal demand:

Item CCS Flow (gpm)

ERCW (gpm)

RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 4,000 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10 Safety Injection Pump 15 Containment Spray Pump 2

Seal Water Heat Exchanger 200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 20 Sample Heat Exchanger B 28 Sample Heat Exchanger C 20 Hot Sample Chiller Package 22 Radiation Monitor 6

Waste Gas Compressor 50 Spent Fuel Pool Hx**

~2,000 Total 8,401 There is no heat load on the Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger during LOCA conditions; however, the flow control valve fails OPEN on loss of air or loss of power so there may be up to 1,000 gpm of flow going through it.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 26 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

    • CCS Train 2A only (flow exists however it is not required) b)

For one Containment Spray Heat Exchanger: 5,200 gpm c)

For two DGs: 2,600 gpm d)

This is not separately available. The required ERCW flow is included in the non-accident CCS Heat Exchanger flow, i.e., 5,050 gpm for > 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />; 7,100 gpm for < 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />.

e)

Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the LOCA unit:

Item ERCW Flow (gpm)

Electric Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 300.0 Main Control Room Chiller (Unit Common) 240.0 Shutdown Board Room Chiller (Unit Common) 560.0 Auxiliary Control Air System Compressor (Unit Common) 3.5 2 X ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 12.0 2 X ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 1.6 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 2 X ERCW Strainer (Unit Common) 900.0 AFW & Boric Acid Transfer Pump Area Cooler (Unit Common) 60.0 AFW & Component Cooling System Area Cooler (Unit Common) 102.0 Emergency Gas Treatment System Room Cooler (Unit Common) 10.0 Spent Fuel Pool & Thermal Barrier Booster Pumps Area Cooler (Unit Common) 29.0 Containment Spray Pump Room Cooler 28.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 27 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 Safety Injection Pump Room Cooler 22.0 Total 2,372.1

18.

BOP - 16 The licensee is requested to provide the following information:

With a loss of Train B:

a) What is the peak heat removal rate demand on the CCS A or B heat exchanger to maintain a unit in Mode 4 assuming the unit achieved Mode 4 in the minimum amount of time after shutdown? And what is the corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet this peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal?

b) What is the concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit?

a)

CCS HX A or B peak heat removal rate to maintain one unit in Mode 4 with loss of Train B:

Item Heat Load (Btu/hr)

RHR Heat Exchanger 89,265,200 Centrifugal Charging Pump 66,760 RHR Pump 100,000 Safety Injection Pump 0

Containment Spray Pump 0

Seal Water Heat Exchanger 517,000 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 2,530,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 0

Sample Heat Exchanger B 0

Sample Heat Exchanger C 0

Hot Sample Chiller Package 0

Radiation Monitor 0

Waste Gas Compressor 0

Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger 21,000,000 Total 113,478,960 Corresponding ERCW flow rate and CCS flow rate to meet peak heat removal rate assuming steam generators are not in use for heat removal:

Item CCS Flow (gpm)

ERCW Flow (gpm)

RHR Heat Exchanger 5,000 7,100 Centrifugal Charging Pump 28 RHR Pump 10

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 28 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Safety Injection Pump 15 Containment Spray Pump 2

Seal Water Heat Exchanger 200 Non-Regenerative Letdown Heat Exchanger 1,000 Sample Heat Exchanger A 20 Sample Heat Exchanger B 28 Sample Heat Exchanger C 20 Hot Sample Chiller Package 22 Radiation Monitor 6

Waste Gas Compressor 50 Spent Fuel Pool Heat Exchanger 2,000 Total 8,401 b)

Concurrent required ERCW flow rate to the other safety related ERCW loads for the Mode 4 unit:

Item ERCW Flow (gpm)

ERCW Pump Cooling (Unit Common) 6.0 ERCW Pump PreLube (Unit Common) 0.8 ERCW Screen Wash (Unit Common) 10.0 Centrifugal Charging Pump Room Cooler 25.0 Elevation 692 Penetration Room Cooler 12.0 Elevation 713 Penetration Room Cooler 11.0 Elevation 737 Penetration Room Cooler 10.0 Pipe Chase Room Cooler 15.0 RHR Pump Room Cooler 19.0 2 X Upper Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety load)*

46.0 2 X Lower Containment Vent Cooler (non-safety Load)*

612.0 2 X Control Rod Drive Mechanism Cooler (non-safety load)*

248.0 2 X Reactor Coolant Pump Motor Air Cooler (non-safety load)*

220.0 Reactor Building Instrument Room Chiller (non-safety load) 30.0 Total 1,264.8

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 29 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

  • These non-safety containment coolers are sized for normal power operation.

During Hot Shutdown (Mode 4) and Cold Shutdown (Mode 5), their cooling loads (and flow requirements) are significantly reduced.

19.

BOP - 17 The licensee has stated on page E1-10 of the June 17, 2015, submittal:

once Unit 1 has been shutdown for 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> or more, the total ERCW heat removal and thus, flow requirements, drop below the flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.

Provide the reasons for the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> time by identifying the heat load on the ERCW system from the shutdown unit and from the LOCA unit at time 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> and explain how two ERCW pumps provides adequate flow at this time.

The 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> time-delay was selected due to limitations in the CCS and the ERCW System to simultaneously mitigate a design basis LOCA on one unit and remove core decay heat from the non-accident unit when the non-accident unit was relying on RHR to remove core decay heat. After 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />, the non-accident unit core decay heat is sufficiently low

(~ 56.7 MBtu/hr) that the CCS and the ERCW System can support both the accident and non-accident units with any single active failure. The actual time delays vary depending on system availability and the single active failure postulated between CCS and the ERCW System. The most limiting time delay is 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> due to the availability of only one CCS pump aligned to CCS HX C.

20.

BOP - 18 The licensee has stated on page E1-11 of the June 17, 2015, submittal:

The requirement to have two ERCW pumps running on one DG is required for the scenario of a LOCA on one unit and the other unit cooled by RHR within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> of shutdown. The single failure of a loss of a train of power must also occur to require two ERCW pumps to be loaded on a single DG.

Other single failures including the loss of a DG or a 6.9 kV shutdown board will not require two ERCW pumps to be loaded on a single DG.

The scenario postulates a case where a single failure does not remove a complete train of electrical power and poses the question whether a second ERCW pump would be required on a single train to supply sufficient flow. This scenario has not been explicitly analyzed. However, for this event, three ERCW pumps would be available for cooldown, with two ERCW pumps on one train and one ERCW pump on the other train. In addition, at least three CCS HXs are available with multiple CCS pumps. Qualitatively, the following table compares the two scenarios:

Item 3 ERCW Pumps on 1 Train 3 ERCW Pumps on 2 Trains ERCW Pumps Available 3

3 ERCW Flow High Flow Velocities

/ Resistance Low Flow Velocities

/ Resistance CCS HXs Available 1 or 2 3

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 30 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted For the above scenario with a loss of a single Train A DG or Train A ERCW pump, where one Train A ERCW pump is running and two Train B ERCW pumps are running:

Has this scenario been analyzed to demonstrate that a second ERCW pump on a DG will not be required as stated? If so, describe the assumptions and results of this analysis.

CCS Pump Available 3 maximum 3 or 4 CCS Flow High Flow Velocities for Train B Lower Velocity for Train B RHR HXs Available 2 maximum 3 or 4 SFP HXs Available 0 for Train B 2

By comparison, it can be seen that the failure of one DG or one ERCW pump results in more equipment available than in the limiting case of a loss of an entire train of 6.9 kV shutdown boards. Therefore, conditions are more favorable for cooldown.

21.

BOP - 19 The licensee has stated on page E1-4 of the July 14, 2015 letter:

When the assumptions include a loss of offsite power and the loss of Train A power, two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B header and in operation when RHR is in service on both units and both units have been shutdown for less than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />.

TVA agrees that the submittal did not provide much discussion of the non-accident case because the LOCA plus shutdown case is more limiting.

There is discussion on pages E1-10 and E1-11 of the license amendment with respect to required ERCW pumps.

The licensee has stated, in effect, if one unit has been shutdown for 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> or greater and the other unit has reached Mode 4 at the earliest opportunity, then TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8 are sufficient without proposed TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17.

The adequacy of two ERCW pumps per train and one CCS pump per train to removal all decay heat from both units for the scenarios provided by the NRC cannot be assured under all worst case conditions. Therefore, the Applicability Note of TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 will be revised by the removal of part b regarding the condition of the opposite unit. The proposed changes to TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 will be provided in a separate submittal.

In light of this information and the removal of TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 Applicability Note b, the third paragraph of the response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 2 provided in TVA letter to NRC, dated July 14, 2015, page E1-4, is revised as follows:

When the assumptions include a loss of offsite power and the loss of Train A power, two CCS pumps need to be aligned to the CCS Train B header and in operation when RHR is in service on both units and both units have either unit has been shutdown for less than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 31 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Accordingly, the staff requests TVA to address the heat removal requirements for Unit 2 shutdown at 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> and Unit 1 having just reached Mode 4 (approximately 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br /> after shutdown) and the following scenarios:

1) DBA Unit 2 (LOCA/LOOP loss of Train A or B)

Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to mitigate the DBA and maintain cool down on Unit1?

Identify associated heat loads and CCS and ERCW flowrates.

2) DBA (LOOP/Loss of Train A or B)

Are the one CCS pump and 2 ERCW pumps for Train A or Train B sufficient to maintain cool down on both units? Identify associated heat loads and CCS and ERCW flowrates.

22.

BOP - 20 The response to BOP-13 part (a) listed the heat load on the RHR heat exchanger as 89,265,200 Btu/hr with a CCS flow rate of 5000 gpm. FSAR Table 5.5-8 (RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL SYSTEM COMPONENT DATA) lists the design heat removal capacity of the RHR heat exchanger as 37,400,000 Btu/hr with a CCS design flow of approximately 5000 GPM.

Explain how the RHR HX will transfer 89,265,200 Btu/hr as listed in BOP-13, including inlet and outlet temperatures on the shell and tubes sides and CCS and RC flow rates.

The values in FSAR Table 5.5-8 represent the design point of the RHR Heat Exchangers. This is just one set of conditions under which the RHR Heat Exchangers can operate. With one (1) RHR Heat Exchanger removing a core decay heat of ~ 89.4 MBtu/hr, one set of flow and temperature conditions for Loss of Train A and Loss of Train B, each, are as follows:

Parameter Loss of Train A EPMJN010890, Table C7.7.89 Loss of Train B EPMJN010890, Table C7.5.9 CCS Inlet Temperature (°F) 108 105 CCS Outlet Temperature (°F) 144 141 CCS Flow (Mlbm/hr) 2.48 2.48 CCS Flow (gpm) 5,000 5,000 RHR Inlet Temperature (°F) 239 247

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 32 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted During actual plant operations, the CCS flow is set to approximately 5,000 gpm and the operators control the rate of cooldown and CCS outlet temperature from the RHR Heat Exchanger by manually throttling the RHR flow rate. All parameters (temperature, pressure, flow rate) are within the RHR Heat Exchanger design conditions as shown on the Vendor datasheets.

RHR Outlet Temperature (°F) 153 148 RHR Flow (Mlbm/hr) 1.05 0.90 RHR Flow (gpm) 2,146 1,828 Core Decay Heat (MBtu/hr) 89.4 89.4 UA (MBtu/(hr - °F))

1.48 1.43

23.

BOP - 21 TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19, Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, Tables E1 and E2.

(a) The total heat load on the CCS heat exchanger (HX) C stated in Table C7.7.69 is 144.72 MBtu/hr (sum of 89.4 MBtu/hr shutdown unit load, 54.8 MBtu/hr LOCA unit load, and 0.53 MBtu/hr miscellaneous loads) is more limiting than the total heat load of 112.03 MBtu/hr given in Table E1. Explain why the data in Table E1 is used to calculate the UA for the virtual CCS HXs for containment analysis and shutdown cooling analysis.

(b) In Table E2, the CCS virtual HX assigned for containment analysis has UA = 3.17 MBtu/hrºF which is consistent with the value used in Westinghouse containment analysis report in Reference 1. What is the UA for the CCS virtual HX assigned for shutdown cooling and how is it

a. Based on Westinghouse analysis sensitivity runs using a UA of 2.0, the containment pressure change is minimal (11.73 to 11.76 psig). TVA will docket the sensitivity analysis in support of the UA used in the TVA Calculation EPMJN010890 Revision 19, Performance of CCS Heat Exchanger Appendix C, Table C7.7.69, and Appendix E, Tables E1 and E2.

The purpose of Appendix E was to develop a representative Heat Exchanger UA value for use by Westinghouse in containment analyses. Since the Watts Bar C HX is shared between the two units, Westinghouse needed to know what the effective part of the heat exchanger was supporting the unit having the LOCA. Appendix E apportions the C HX UA value according to the percent mass flow going to the heat exchanger from each unit.

Appendix E1 was started prior to the project to add a third ERCW pump to support the Hot Shutdown / LOCA-Recirculation mode of operation within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> of a unit shutdown. The flows and heat loads reflect two ERCW pumps in operation and after 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> from shutdown. Heat Exchanger UA values are a function of heat exchanger geometry and flow and are not dependent on heat duty on the device.

Using the lower two ERCW pump flow of 7,125 gpm would produce lower UA values than the use of the higher 9,200 MBtu/hr flow from three ERCW pumps. Note that the LOCA containment analysis must support both two and three ERCW pumps in-service.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 33 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted calculated based on the real CCS HX UA =

6.44 MBtu/hr-ºF?

(c) Provide the analysis that shows that the calculated value of shutdown unit virtual HX CCS UA (based on UA = 3.17 MBtu/hr-ºF for the CCS LOCA virtual HX and 6.44 MBtu/hr-ºF for the real CCS HX) can handle the shutdown cooling load of 89.4 MBtu/hr plus 0.53 MBtu/hr miscellaneous loads.

(d) Table C7.7.69 states the RHR HX heat load for the shutdown unit is 89.4 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load occur?

(e) Table E1 states RHR HX heat load for shutdown unit s 56.7 MBtu/hr. At what time during the shutdown transient does this load occur?

(f) Tables C7.7.69 and E1 states the RHR HX heat load for the LOCA unit is 54.8 MBtu/hr.

Please confirm this is the heat load at the initiation of the RHR sprays assumed to start operating at 3600 second from the LOCA initiation.

(g) At what time does the LOCA occur in relation to the initiation of the shutdown transient assumed in Tables C7.7.69 and E1?

(h) Tables C7.7.69 and E1, miscellaneous heat load 0.53 MBtu/hr is for which unit. Confirm whether this is a combined miscellaneous load for both units, and if so, how much is imposed on each During discussions with NRC reviewers, a question was posed as to the conservatism of using a mass flow based allotment of UA. A counter proposal was made that the allotment should be made based on the heat load from each unit.

The spreadsheets at the end of this enclosure provide a comparison between the two methods, using 9,200 gpm total ERCW flow. These spreadsheets will be added to Calculation EPMJN010890, Appendix E.

c. Response to a and b will address c. Results of a and b will also be provided.
b. Add data sheets reflecting virtual CCS HX performance based on CCS Flow and CCS heat load. Include sensitivity analysis based on ERCW flow based on heat load.

Using the larger 9,200 gpm ERCW flow the real HX UA is 6.82 MBtu/hr-F. With the HX apportioned by Flow, the shutdown cooling HX UA is 3.35 (the same as the LOCA unit). With the HX apportioned by Heat Load, the shutdown cooling HX UA is 4.12 MBtu/hr-F. It is calculated the same as above for the LOCA unit.

c. This is demonstrated by Table C7.7.69 and is reproduced in the first table above for a total ERCW flow of 9,200 gpm. All ERCW and CCS temperatures are acceptable.

Note: the miscellaneous heat load and flow gets its own virtual HX with UA apportioned by either Flow or Heat Load.

d. 7 - hours
e. 48 - hours
f.

In TVAs calculation, the 54.8 MBtu/hr is assumed from initiation of recirculation mode

(~40 minutes assuming the loss of train event).

g. For GDC-5 analysis, the LOCA occurs 7-hours after the initiation of a shutdown on the non-accident unit.
h. 0.53 MBtu/hr is the combined miscellaneous heat load for two units. The miscellaneous loads are accounted for using an additional virtual heat exchanger.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 34 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted CCS virtual HX.

(i) What is the maximum operating temperature of the CCS fluid under the condition of the most limiting heat load on the RHR HX C?

(j) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, explain the difference between the design and actual values for ho and hi for the CCS and RHR HXs.

(k) Refer to Section 6.1.4 and 6.1.5 of the calculation which states the HX tubes were changed from 90-10 copper nickel to stainless steel. Confirm that the CCS U and UA given in Tables C7.7.69 and E1 are based on the as-built HX material thermal conductivity, tube thickness, worst fouling resistance and tube plugging.

(l) In Tables C7.7.69, E1, and E2, what is represented by F, R, and S and the HX correction factor r, and p?

i.

The limiting temperature is 146°F CCS temperature at the outlet of the RHR HX (analyzed pipe stress limit). The Operating Modes calculation EPMJK022988 shows that CCS temperatures through the RHR HX should not exceed 146ºF. The stress calculation is N3-70-04A.

j.

See EPMJN010890, Section 7.1, Sheet 31 and 32.

k. See EPMJN010890, Section 6.1
l.

See EPMJN010890, Section 7.0.2, Equation 10 and Section 7.3, Sheets 41 and 42.

24.

BOP - 22 In BOP-13-16, the licensee listed the design heat loads and corresponding required flow rates for CCS and ERCW during a DBA and loss of Train A or Train B. One of the design basis conditions is a loss of downstream dam.

Describe and justify how the ERCW design accounts for a loss of downstream dam during a DBA with the equipment and system lineups that are specified in both LCOs of TS 3.7.8 and proposed TS 3.7.17.

As documented in MDQ00006720080341 Appendices 11 (two ERCW Pumps) and 17 (three ERCW Pumps), MULTIFLOW demonstrates that the ERCW pumps develop sufficient head to supply all required users during loss of downstream dam conditions.

Calculation EPM-WUC-072489 demonstrates that three ERCW pumps have required NPSHA for loss of downstream dam conditions.

25.

ELEC 3 As documented in NUREG-0847, "Safety Evaluation Response Summary from TVA Letter to NRC dated August 3, 2015:

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 35 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Report Related to the Operation of Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 2," Supplement 22, (SSER 22) published February 2011, the licensing basis of Watts Bar Nuclear Units is:

1. Dual-unit trip as a result of an abnormal operational occurrence
2. Accident in one unit and concurrent shutdown of the second unit (with and without offsite power)
3. Accident in one unit and spurious engineered safety feature actuation in the other unit (with and without offsite power)

The license amendment request (LAR) for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) Unit 1, dated June 17, 2015 (Agencywide Documents Access and Management System (ADAMS) Accession No. ML15170A474) proposes realignment of Component Cooling System pumps and Essential Raw Cooling Water (ERCW)

Pumps to support heat removal capability.

The staff is also reviewing a LAR submitted by letter dated August 1, 2013 (ADAMS Accession No. ML13220A103), to modify limiting conditions for operation for Technical Specification 3.8.1, AC Sources - Operating, for the available maintenance feeder for Common Station Service Transformers (CSSTs) A and B.

The staff is requesting clarification on loading of onsite and offsite power systems and has determined that the following additional information is needed to complete the review of the LAR:

1. For the scenarios related to dual unit shutdown with offsite power system available, please Q1 With offsite power available, there is no change to the licensing basis documented in SSER 22. Changes to the cases in the calculations for the dual unit shutdown with offsite power available were not revised in association with the June 17, 2015 LAR.

The SI pump, Containment Spray pump, and AFW pump combined horsepower is approximately 1660 horsepower. This is approximately twice the horsepower requirement of an ERCW pump. Since these three pumps are not running for the GDC-5 case, there is considerable margin compared to the limiting case thus demonstrating that the start of a second ERCW pump on a non-accident shutdown board is acceptable and bounded by the LOCA/inadvertent SI case.

The evaluations of CSSTs A and B are included in WBN calculation EDQ00099920070002, AC Auxiliary Power System Analysis. TVA submitted a response to NRC Open Items from SSER 22 on April 6, 2011 for WBN Unit 2. This submittal described the margin studies done for all four CSSTs. The margin studies that TVA provided in the submittal were discussed in SSER 24 in relation to the closure of SSER Open Items 27 and 28. Because the LOCA on one unit with an inadvertent SI on the other unit results in a higher load than the scenario discussed in the LAR, additional margin studies were not required.

Q2 The DG loading for the first 20 minutes is the base case loading described in the WBN Calculation EDQ00099920080014, Diesel Generator Loading Analysis. The CCS pumps are assumed to start and run in the base case, so the proposed amendment related to CCS does not represent a change from an electrical standpoint. The loading of a second ERCW pump on an individual DG occurs no earlier than 40 minutes after DG start. This is why the base case applies for the first 20 minutes.

Table 3 of the June 17, 2015 submittal represents the bounding cases after 20 minutes.

The values in the table provide the horsepower assumed for each of the large motor loads for each available DG and provide the total kW loading on each available DG for the scenarios in Table 3. Attachment 1 of that letter provided excerpts from the DG loading calculation including tables that summarized the loads on each DG for a variety of cases including Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) / LOCA and dual unit cases.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 36 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted provide a summary of the calculations performed to evaluate capability of offsite power transformers CSST A and B for the licensing basis documented in SSER 22. Provide the impact of changes proposed in the June 17, 2015, LAR on the licensing basis documented in SSER

22.
2. Table 3 in Enclosure 1 of the WBN Unit 1, LAR dated June 17, 2015, contains the Summary of Steady-State Diesel Generator (DG) Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (>20 minutes) only.

Please clarify whether the electrical system loadings considered in Table 3 of the LAR is bounding for all the scenarios without offsite power addressed in SSER 22 summarized above. For the scenarios related to shutdown using onsite power systems, please provide details (calculations or explanation) related to large motor loads (Rating and horse power value) considered for the specific scenarios. Provide details of additional kilo-Watt (kW) loading considered in the total kW loading of each DG. Also provide DG loadings during 20 minutes.

3. Please provide details on any load shedding that may be procedurally controlled to preclude overloading the power source(s).

Date Posted: 07/31/15 Q3 Before a second ERCW pump can be loaded on its DG, the AFW Pump, if running, will be stopped and the main control room hand switch placed in pull-to-lock. This action assures that the AFW pump will not inadvertently start to preclude overloading the DG. TVA currently plans to include these actions in the same procedure that starts the second ERCW pump. The actions will be placed in a step that precedes the start of the second ERCW pump. This is the only load shed assumed in the DG loading analysis.

26.

ELEC - 4 Resolve the apparent discrepancy between the DG loading calculation, Appendix N for AFW load on LOCA unit and the June 17, 2015 Enclosure 1, Table 3 AFW load indicated on the LOCA unit (i.e., 600 hp versus 300 hp).

A revision to the DG loading calculation has been completed. Discrepancies between the revised calculation and Enclosure 1, Table 3 of the June 17, 2015 letter have been resolved. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on Sharepoint. An updated version of Enclosure 1, Table 3 is included at the end of this enclosure.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 37 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Also update Enclosure 1, Table 3 to reflect other corrections made to DG loading Calculation.

27.

ELEC - 5 Evaluate the differences in DG loading for a small break LOCA. Is the large break LOCA assumed in the GDC 5 analysis bounding?

A revision to the DG loading calculation is in progress with an outcome that is expected to be favorable. An updated version of the DG loading calculation has been posted on Sharepoint.

28.

HF - 1 Describe what cues will be provided to the operator indicating that new and changed manual actions (as described in TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 5, Item 1) are required. In your response, identify the specific plant condition, annunciator status, associated alarms, and procedure steps that will provide instructions to the operator. Further, identify information that is required to inform the operator that these manual actions have been correctly performed, and that they can be terminated.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 The first cue provided to the operating staff is a procedural step in E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant to check the status of electrical power. Should a complete loss of either train of 6.9 kilovolt (kV) shutdown board be detected in this step, the procedure will require that additional actions be taken.

The first action will be to determine if the remaining train of power is supplied from offsite or DG source. If the offsite power source is supplying the bus, the operator is directed to start an additional ERCW pump associated with the shutdown units 6.9 kV shutdown board that remains powered. Depending on the train of power lost, the operations staff may be required to start an additional CCS pump.

Should the source of power remaining be the DGs, the operator is directed to perform actions in accordance with an appendix to the E-1 procedure. This appendix is handed off to the shutdown unit.

The shutdown unit will first determine if RHR cooling is in service. If RHR cooling is NOT in service, the shutdown unit is directed to secure plant cooldown and maintain current plant temperature. An additional action is specified to perform throttling of ERCW cooling flow through the CCS heat exchanger (HX), if required due to the specific loss of power.

If RHR cooling is in service, actions are contained in the Appendix to: place the motor driven AFW (MDAFW) pump hand switch in pull-to-lock (PTL) if the turbine driven AFW (TDAFW) pump is in operation, dispatch an operator to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the ERCW bypass switch in the bypass condition and start the ERCW pump when 20 minutes have elapsed.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 38 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The main control room (MCR) will be alerted that the bypass switch has been placed in bypass by a MCR annunciator that alarms when the switch is placed in bypass. Should the field operator position the wrong switch, the MCR staff would become aware of this fact upon attempting to start the ERCW pump. The expected indications, breaker position lights, pump amps, discharge pressure and flow, would not be observed. This would cue the MCR staff to request that the field operator verify the correct switch had been operated.

An additional cue is provided in a note contained in the main body procedure response of E-1 that the additional ERCW pump must be placed in service prior to aligning containment sump recirculation on the accident unit.

Once the additional alignments are put in place by E-1, they will remain in place until a determination is made by the Emergency Response Organization (ERO) that conditions no longer require their operation. In this event, the Technical Support Center (TSC) will be staffed and the Shift Manager (SM) will transfer Site Emergency Director duties to the TSC. Since the continued need of the additional alignments will vary depending on the specific conditions at the start of the event, no attempt was made to proceduralize securing the alignments. The SM will consult with the TSC to determine that plant conditions are such that the alignments are no longer required.

29.

HF - 2 Describe how the operators of each of two units will be informed of the status of the other unit, and how their actions will be coordinated. Clarify if one of the two units will be put in lead, and what events will result in changes to the chain of command.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 In this case, the accident unit will be considered to be in the lead during the event since the emergency operating procedure (EOP) for the accident unit is the driver for actions required. Upon EOP entry, the accident units Unit Supervisor (US) will perform a crew update. Although this update is primarily intended to focus the attention of the particular units crew, the common design of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN) MCR allows either units operating staff to hear a crew update performed on either unit. In addition, the many alarms that are received during a LOCA will be immediately noticed by the shutdown unit, so there is no potential that the shutdown unit will not realize that conditions have degraded on the accident unit.

Upon EOP entry, the standard practice at WBN is to recall the Shift Technical Advisor (STA) and the SM to the MCR, if they are not currently present. This is practiced routinely during operator requalification training by removing all persons from the simulator except for the minimum staffing requirements. A condition is then inserted on the simulator, and the operators remaining in the MCR are required to recall the rest of the staff to the

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 39 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted simulator to combat the casualty.

The standard chain of command will remain in effect during this event. The SM retains overall oversight and will have overall responsibility for ensuring dual unit activities are adequately prioritized and supported. The STA provides additional oversight and backup that the accident crew is taking appropriate actions based on the plant conditions at the accident unit. The accident unit US directs the crews response in the EOP. The shutdown unit US directs the procedural activities required for shutdown.

The accident unit operating staff will conduct the electrical power monitoring activities directed in procedure E-1. When a complete loss of one train of power is detected, the US will direct the appropriate mitigating steps based on the existing conditions. The duties required of the shutdown unit will be directed by handing off the attachment of E-1 that contains the necessary actions.

In this event, the communication between the units will be provided via US communication or the SM. The nature of this event is that a large number of alarms will occur, so the fact that something unusual has happened to the accident unit will be readily apparent to the shutdown unit. It is predictable that the annunciators, coupled with the observed level of activity on the accident unit, will prompt one of the shutdown units operators to be dispatched to gather information on what is happening on the accident unit. It would also be the expectation that if the shutdown units condition allows, one of the Unit Operators (UOs) from the shutdown unit would function to support mitigating activities on the accident unit.

30.

HF - 3 Describe if TVA identified any relevant, pre-existing performance issues associated with procedural guidance, training, and operator manual actions related to starting and stopping ERCW and CCW pumps and operating switches on the 6.9 kV shutdown board or issues associated with dual unit operation at other sites.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 The Institute of Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) Operating Experience (OE) database and the TVA OE database were searched for industry events associated with ERCW, CCS and dual unit operations. The list obtained from these searches was reviewed to determine lessons that might need to be incorporated in the development of this design change. In addition, WBN benchmarked both Sequoyah and Browns Ferry for lessons learned on dual unit operations. This benchmarking ultimately resulted in the generic post-accident response that was developed in coordinating the WBN actions for this postulated event.

The most common identified OE associated with dual unit operation of equipment involved plant transients due to operation of the wrong unit component. In this case, the changes

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 40 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted at WBN do not fit this common error mode, in that the ERCW is common unit equipment, so that there is no potential for operating the correct component on the wrong unit. The method chosen for alignment of the second train B CCS pump (normally from the shutdown unit and operated by the shutdown units staff) also provides protection from wrong unit equipment concerns. The CCS pump will only be started on a LOCA accompanied with a loss of train of electrical power. In this case, the B train CCS pump for the accident unit will automatically start, so the chances that the operating unit staff will attempt to manipulate this component are nonexistent.

Another common identified OE involved misoperation of the expected component. This condition is precluded by the WBN design in that the MCR staff will be alerted that the interlock bypass switch has been placed in the correct position by MCR annunciation.

31.

HF - 4 Describe any changes that were required of the Control Room task analysis that was done as part of TVAs Detailed Control Room Design Review. If no update to the task analysis was necessary, describe how task requirements were developed for the identified new and changed operator actions.

Describe what reasonable or credible potential errors associated with the new and changed operator actions were identified during task analysis.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 During development of this design change, operations, training and engineering personnel worked to determine the final product that would be installed in the plant. Operations is a quorum member of all Design Change Notice (DCN) meetings in order to ensure that operations provides input into all design changes implemented in the plant.

No new switches or components were added in the MCR for this issue. Components operated in the MCR are: 1 CCS pump, 1 ERCW pump, 1 AFW handswitch and ERCW flow control valves (FCVs) for CCS HX. These components are already routinely operated by the MCR staff for multiple normal alignments and casualty situations.

A new annunciator designed consistent with current design requirements, MCR standards, and NUREG-0700 requirements has been added to the MCR. The WBN Annunciator Response Instructions contain the response to this annunciator, consistent with the method contained in the existing annunciator response guidance.

An additional bypass switch has been added to the 6.9 kV shutdown boards to allow starting the third ERCW pump if DG power is all that is available. If required, a Nuclear Assistant Unit Operator (NAUO) will be dispatched to the area to operate the switch. The switch itself is new, but the task of aligning electrical board transfer switches is one that is routinely performed by the NAUOs. The new switches most closely resemble the Appendix R transfer switches that are located on multiple electrical components that are currently operated by NAUOs when required.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 41 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted The interlock bypass switches are labeled consistent with other plant equipment as required by TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. The positions of the switch are clearly discernable. Attached to this response are several pictures of the new switches to convey location and labeling that is installed in the plant.

When installed, the switches for each electrical board will be checked and independently verified to be in the correct position at least once per month. The switches will be added to the DG standby checklist which is performed after each monthly DG surveillance or for any evolution that has removed the DG from service. This will require 8 NAUOs to view the switches and their positions locally each month. This frequent check, coupled with standard labeling and similarity of this task to those already performed by the NAUOs, gives the station great confidence that switch operation can be successfully performed by the NAUOs.

32.

HF - 5 Describe any increase in operator workload that will occur with the proposed license amendment Date Posted: 07/31/15 The increase in workload due to this license amendment is considered well within the existing capabilities of the current required minimum staffing complement. The actions added are: monitoring status of electrical power and taking the appropriate actions to start an ERCW/CCS pump.

If offsite power is supplied to the remaining electrical power train, additional actions are limited to starting the ERCW pump, and potentially the B train CCS pump. An additional potential action is throttling CCS HX flows if required. These activities can be performed by one individual in a 1 to 2 minute timeframe.

If DG power is the only source to the remaining electrical train, actions in addition to the ones above are required. These actions will have minimum impact on the accident unit operating staff as the Attachment directing these actions will be handed off to the shutdown unit to complete. The actions of the attachment to prepare to start an additional ERCW pump will require dispatching an NAUO to the 6.9 kV shutdown board to place the bypass switch in the bypass position. The switch positioning and access to the board room area will require approximately 3 minutes and 35 seconds as outlined in the previously submitted dose assessment. The shutdown unit will then start an additional ERCW pump after 40 minutes has elapsed.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 42 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

33.

HF - 6 Describe the process used to design the ERCW pump interlock bypass switch. In your response, explain if the switch complies with control room standards and the applicable guidance of NUREG-0700, Human-System Interface Design Review Guidelines. Further, describe how the bypassed and non-bypassed states are labeled, and whether they are augmented with status lights showing actual valve position Date Posted: 07/31/15 NPG-SPP-09.3, Plant Modifications and Engineering Change Control, outlines the process in which the bypass switches were designed and installed. In this particular instance, DCN 53785 is being utilized to install the ERCW pump interlock bypass switches.

The bypass switches are not augmented with status lights. As shown on the pictures at the end of this enclosure, the positions of bypass and normal are clearly labeled. When the switch is taken to bypass, an alarm is received in the MCR. Thus, when the MCR operators dispatch the NAUO to position this switch, the alarm that is received will inform them that the action is complete prior to the communication from the NAUO. Should the NAUO fail to position the switch correctly, the lack of alarm will provide the MCR staff with opportunity to identify the error. Should the NAUO position the wrong switch, the ERCW pump will fail to start which will alert the operators that verification is needed to ensure that previous actions were performed correctly.

The switches conform to the requirements for local workstation controls outlined in NUREG-0700. Labeling of the switches is in accordance with labeling requirements of TI-12.14, Replacement and Upgrade of Plant Component Identification Tagging and Labeling. This labeling is consistent with other components that the operating staff manipulates during routine evolutions. Standard abbreviations are used on the switch, are easily recognizable to the station staff and are defined in 0-TI-12.13, Acronyms/Abbreviations Listing for Labeling. The positions required to be selected are clearly marked and align with the instruction that is outlined in procedures. A picture of the switch and labeling provided at the end of this enclosure.

34.

HF - 7 TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Question 5, Item 2, paragraph b states, in part: The final decision about what procedures will be affected by this license amendment request is part of the impact review that occurs once the submittal is approved.

NUREG-1764, Guidance for the Review of Changes to Human Actions, Revision 1, Section 3.8, Procedure Design, states, in part: The objective of The information contained in this response supersedes the information originally provided to the NRC concerning the procedures that will be developed for this event. TVAs initial response indicated that E-0 and ES-1.3 would contain the guidance that would be implemented post LOCA. After initial drafts were reviewed, it was determined that this guidance more appropriately belonged in the EOP associated with a LOCA (E-1).

A list of procedures that will ultimately be modified based on the changes needed to implement the requirements is included near the end of this enclosure. The previous TVA statement regarding the final decision about what procedures will be affected by this license amendment request is part of the impact review that occurs once the submittal is approved requires clarification. The procedures will not actually be implemented until the license amendment request (LAR) process is complete. However, part of the LAR

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 43 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted this review is to verify that applicable plant procedures have been appropriately modified, where needed, to provide adequate guidance for the successful completion of the [Human Actions] HAs, and that the procedures adequately reflect changes in plant equipment and HAs.

Identify any new, revised, or deleted procedures required to support the proposed LAR not previously identified in docketed submittals. Provide procedure number, revision, title, and a summary of the actions changed, added, or deleted.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 process and the accompanying DCN process require that impacts be identified in advance of the LAR or DCN. Therefore, at this time, TVA has a good understanding of the scope of the procedure revisions required. Drafts of the proposed changes have been distributed for review to the appropriate personnel.

The only procedure that has been changed at this time is 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B System Operating Instruction. Revision 005 of this instruction was issued to ensure that the bypass switch on the 6.9 kV shutdown board is checked during the performance of the DG standby checklist. This change has been field verified to ensure the guidance in the procedure is consistent with the equipment information in the field.

The remaining procedures needed to implement this change will be issued as the implementing process requires. For the bypass switches, this will occur on return to operation of the DCN paperwork following the work to install the switches. For the remainder, it will follow LAR approval.

The GO and EOP procedures will be changed as required to support the issuance of Unit 2 EOPs. This is currently procedurally defined as sometime between completion of Hot Functional Testing and fuel load. Although an actual date can not be identified, the entire Unit 2 EOP network will be required to be in place prior to operation of Unit 2.

The guidance needed to realign lineups required in the CCS and ERCW systems is currently in place. Therefore, no future change to these procedures is required to implement these actions. Although it is possible that validations of the procedures remaining to be issued might identify a note or other informational enhancements that might be required, they would not constitute a condition that would prevent issuing the revised procedures.

35.

HF - 8 Describe how the operators access and use Technical Specifications (e.g., if they are available electronically, as a hard copy, etc.). Describe the interface between the Emergency Operating procedures and Technical Specifications, specifically, if the procedures refer the operator to the Technical Two hard copies of each units TS are available in the MCR. One is maintained at the US station and the other is at the SM desk. TS are also available electronically via the WBN electronic document storage and retrieval system known as the Business Support Library (BSL). Access to BSL for documents is routinely performed by the operating staff to print copies for performing surveillance instructions and to verify that the hard copies used are the current revision of the procedure.

The Abnormal Operating Instructions (AOI) identify the potential TS that could be

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 44 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Specifications Date Posted: 07/31/15 impacted by the particular event in a list format. When entry into the AOI procedures occurs, this list and TS will be referenced to identify any TS limitations or required actions.

This is particularly important in the AOI network, as these are the instructions that are used to combat emergencies in a condition where the plant may maintain operation in Modes 1 and 2.

The emergency operating instructions (EOI) do not contain direct reference to TS information. This network will be utilized following a reactor trip and presuppose a condition adverse to TS has occurred such as loss of primary pressure boundary, complete loss of AC power, steam generator (SG) tube leak, or steam line rupture for which the potential TS limitations or required actions are secondary to ensuring that immediate actions are taken to place or restore the plant to a stable condition. In the case of entry into the EOI network, conforming to the Westinghouse developed Emergency Response Guidelines (ERG) ensures the plant is maintained in the safest condition for the event. It would then become the responsibility of the operating staff and the emergency response organization to identify potential impacts to TS equipment that may influence future actions that are the result of the plant condition.

36.

HF - 9 Describe the plans and schedules for revising the training program, to reflect the changes in the proposed license amendment. Clarify if training will be provided prior to implementation of the proposed changes.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 Training representatives are part of the team that reviews DCN and LAR impacts. In addition, one of the responsibilities of the Operations member reviewing impacts is to make a determination if training is impacted and to inform the appropriate training management representative if training is required.

The training associated with these changes will be performed in multiple formats.

Relevant DCN impacts to the plant are included each licensed operator requalification (LOR) cycle in the Plant Changes portion. The Plant Changes training covers DCN changes, procedure changes, relevant industry events and significant corrective action events.

The training changes required for this change are tracked in the corrective action program. The training needs analysis has been performed. Additions to the Changes Lesson Plan and the lesson plans associated with the ERCW System and CCS will be complete for the next scheduled LOR training cycle. All training will be complete prior to the implementation of the license amendment request.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 45 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

37.

HF - 10 Describe the process used to verify and validate the ability of TVAs operators to accomplish tasks required for the proposed license amendment. In lieu of a description, relevant administrative procedure(s) for verification and validation or a verification and validation plan for the proposed change (if developed) may be provided. In your response, clarify if the validation will include a representative sample of operators and whether it will be performed with Technical Specification minimum staffing and nominal staffing.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 NPG-SPP-01.2.1, Interim Administration of Site Technical Procedures for Watts Bar 1 and 2, contains the requirements that must be met when developing or revising technical procedures. This would apply to the SOIs and GOs associated with the change. As defined in the procedure review verification checklist (Attachment 3) of this procedure, various activities are performed to ensure that the procedure guidance is developed in a manner that includes consideration for human factors.

The following is a list of some of the items that are required to be verified in procedure development:

Does the procedure agree with and reference applicable drawings?

Can the procedure be correctly performed in the designated sequence?

Are equipment numbers and nomenclature used in the procedure identifiable to those displayed on the equipment?

Can equipment identified in the procedure be easily located?

Are the units of measurement used in the procedure to record readings the same as those displayed on the equipment?

Have human factors and system interactions been properly considered?

Procedures are walked down after development to ensure that the information provided in the procedure agrees with conditions in the field. Personnel who would normally perform the task are the individuals who are tasked with these walkdowns to ensure that the developed content provides the level of detail that is needed to successfully perform the evolution.

For the emergency operating network, TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI)

Control, contains a more specific validation process. This instruction defines what validation method should be used based on the change, the persons that should make up the validation team, how the validation is conducted and how the validation is documented.

In all cases involving the EOI network, consideration is taken on whether the task can be performed by the minimum shift compliment. If it is judged that the task would interfere with the ability of minimum shift staffing requirements, then efforts are taken to either redevelop the desired process or increase the required staffing as an interim measure.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 46 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

38.

HF - 11 Describe the process used to monitor new and changed operator actions to ensure that they remain feasible and reliable over the long term, and are not degraded due to design changes, inadequate training, or other mechanisms.

Date Posted: 07/31/15 TI-12.11, Emergency Operating Instruction (EOI) Control, contains direction that is intended to address this very concern. For the current modification, the EOI network contains the only procedures that this issue might apply to.

Limitations presented by having additional persons to perform the CCS and ERCW alignments prior to entering Mode 4 do not represent a safety concern. If insufficient staff is available to accomplish these alignments, then entry into Mode 4 will be prohibited.

This represents a station efficiency and outage completion concern and not a safety concern. In practice, Operations crews transition to super crew alignment approximately two weeks prior to the start of the outage, so sufficient personnel will be available to prevent this from being a concern.

The actions taken in the EOI network require an initial assessment for this very concern.

In addition, any future revisions are required to evaluate whether minimum operator staffing levels are impacted by the proposed change.

Operator requalification training on EOIs provides a means of periodically verifying the technical adequacy of emergency instructions. Operators and training personnel are responsible for ensuring that problems or discrepancies discovered in EOIs during training are documented using a Condition Report or Procedure Change Request (PCR), as appropriate. Proposed enhancements and suggestions for improvement of EOIs are also encouraged.

Should a future attempt be made to change the operation of the bypass switches, plant processes would identify that this would require a 10 CFR 50.59 review. This review would prevent future manipulations that would have a negative impact on maintaining plant safety.

39.

HF - 12 TVAs response to NRC Acceptance Review Questions dated July 14, 2015 (ADAMS Accession Number ML15197A357), Question 5, Item 4 states:

An interlock bypass switch for ERCW pumps will be installed as described above and in the license amendment request. An annunciator window will be There will be a total of four bypass switches installed, one on each 6.9 kV shutdown board. Each bypass switch will bypass the interlock that prevents two ERCW Pumps from being powered from the same shutdown board.

Only one annunciator will be added. The ERCW annunciator panel in the MCR is a common annunciator panel (does not have a separate panel for Unit 1 and Unit 2).

Pictures of the MCR annunciator panel and the window for this alarm are included at the end of this enclosure.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 47 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted added in the main control room to show when an interlock bypass switch has been activated.

Clarify how many interlock bypass switches will be installed and how many annunciator windows will be added. Further, clarify if all bypass switches will be identical in design an appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling The main function of the alarm is to alert the operations staff should the switch be moved from its normal position during normal operations. (See pictures of switch at the end of this enclosure). In this case, the ARI will direct that an operator be dispatched to the 6.9 kV shutdown boards to determine which switch has been moved to the bypass position.

All bypass switches will be identical in design and appearance, with the exception of identification and labeling, which is unique for each 6.9 kV shutdown board.

40.

HF - 13 TVAs application dated June 17, 2015 (ADAMS Accession Number ML15170A474), Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, states, in part: The following procedures will be affected System Operating Instruction SOI-70.01, Component Cooling Water (CCS) System. This SOI does not require a revision because the steps to realign the CCS Train B pumps are currently in the procedure.

Clarify how SOI-70.01 is affected by the changes proposed in this LAR, if it does not require a revision.

This response supersedes the response provided on June 17, 2015. The procedure guidance for aligning either CCS Pump 1B-B or 2B-B previously existed in 0-SOI-70.01, thus no change is required to this instruction for the proposed changes.

41.

SCVB-RAI-1 Reference 1, Attachment to Enclosure 1, Westinghouse Summary Report, Section 4.4.1.3, seventh bullet in the summarized assumptions for mass and energy release analysis states Density and specific heat values of 501 lbm/ft2 and 0.145 BTU/lbm-°F, respectively, model a volumetric heat capacity which bounds the values found in Part D of the ASME boiler pressure vessel code.

(a) Provide the material specification for which the (a) The material properties chosen are intended to represent the three most common structural materials in the RCS; stainless steel 304, stainless steel 316, and low alloy carbon steel.

(b) The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section II, Part D (Reference 1)

[hereafter referred to as "the ASME BPVC" (Reference 1)] was used as the source of the material property data. Table PRD provides material densities in units of lbm/in3.

The density of 0.29 lbm/in3 (converted to 501 lbm/ft3) is representative of the density at a cold state of 70°F for Stainless Steel 304 and Stainless Steel 316. The density of carbon steel at a cold state of 70°F is listed as 0.28 lbm/in3 (converted to 484 lbm/ft3). The bulk of the metal mass in the reactor vessel and the steam generators is carbon steel. The density of stainless steel, 501 lbm/ft3, was conservatively applied to all steel alloys (note that the steam generator tube material

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 48 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted above density and specific heat values are assumed.

(b) Confirm that the assumed density 501 lbm/ft3 bounds the values given in Part D of the ASME Section II Boiler and Pressure Vessel code instead of Part D of ASME boiler pressure vessel code, If not provide more information regarding the source of the assumed value of density.

(c) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC),

Section II, Part D does not provide specific heat values. Please state the source document of the ASME specific heat of the RCS metal which is bounded by the assumed specific heat of 0.145 BTU/lbm-°F given in the above statement.

is treated separately) in the LOCA Mass and Energy (M&E) calculations to maximize the metal mass.

(c) The specific heat (as a function of temperature) was determined for each material by using the following information from the ASME BPVC (Reference 1); the equation relating thermal conductivity, thermal diffusivity, density, and specific heat from the Table TCD General Notes, thermal expansion coefficients in Tables TE-1 through TE-4, thermal conductivities in Table TCD, and thermal diffusivities in Table TCD. An uncertainty of 10% was added to the calculated specific heat values.

The computer codes that are part of the WCAP-10325-P-A evaluation model are constructed such that a single specific heat value is required. Therefore, a bounding value of 0.145 BTU/lbm°F provides a conservative estimate of the total amount of metal energy over the temperature range that is relevant in a LOCA M&E calculation (metal cools down from approximately 600°F to 200°F) for all three of the structural steel alloys.

Reference:

1.

An International Code, 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2010 Edition, July 1, 2010,Section II, Part D, Properties (Customary), Materials, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee on Materials, Three Park Avenue, New York, NY, 10016 USA.

42.

SCVB-RAI-2 Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Section 4.0, Conclusions, first paragraph states calculated values of the ice weight from containment analysis 2,585,000 lbs with an average ice basket weight of 1,330 lbs. The second paragraph states an ice weight specified in Surveillance Requirement (SR) 3.6.11.2 will be 2,750,700 lbs with a per basket value of 1415 lbs specified in SR 3.6.11.2 and SR 3.6.11.3.

(a) Please confirm that the difference between the SR value 2,750,000 lbs and the analytical value The difference between 2,750,700 lbs and the analytical value of 2,585,000 lbs considers losses due to sublimation only. The surveillance requirements address uncertainties introduced through weighing.

(a) The Surveillance Requirement value of 2,750,700 pounds contains a sublimation allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement uncertainty. The fact that the value does not include the measurement uncertainty is stated in the Technical Specification Bases for SR 3.6.11.2 and 3. Surveillance Instruction 1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Condenser Surveillance states that the instrument uncertainty must be added to the SR ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately

+15 lbs.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 49 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted 2,585,000 lbs considers the sublimation allowance and the measurement uncertainty during surveillance. If so, how much individual margins are provided for sublimation and measurement uncertainty. If not, explain the basis for the difference between the two values.

(b) Please explain the methodology used for calculating the sublimation allowance. What are the assumed initial parameters (such as ice temperature, environment temperature in the ice condenser, etc) for the calculation?

(b) The method used for determining the sublimation rate is from cycle to cycle ice basket weighing. The as-left basket weight is compared to the as-found basket weight in the next cycle for the same basket. Overall trends for the ice bed at large and on a row group basis are also used to validate the sublimation rate. Historical data for WBN Unit 1 and for Sequoyah Nuclear Plant have shown cycle to cycle sublimation rates of around three percent. The selection of six percent is based on engineering judgment to provide a large safety margin.

The FSAR 6.7.14.3 will be updated to reflect the following.

Sublimation - Historical The following information was developed during the design and initial operation of the ice condenser system. Actual sublimation rates have been established during the operation of Watts Bar and are discussed in the Section entitled Sublimation - Actual.

The other mechanism that affects the long-term storage of the ice is sublimation.

Sublimation has several effects inside the ice condenser. The geometry of the ice mass changes where sublimation occurs, and the resulting vapor is deposited on a colder surface at another location inside the ice condenser.

In normal cold storage room application, the cooling coil is exposed to the air in the room, and moisture in the air freezes on the coil. If ice is stored in the room, all of ice eventually migrates to the coil (which is defrosted periodically, draining the water outside the room) through a sublimation-mass transfer mechanism. To avoid the mechanism, and maintain a constant mass of ice, the ice condenser is provided with double wall insulation. The annular gap between the insulated walls is provided with a heat sink in the form of a flow of cool, dry air that enters arid and leaves through the insulated panels.

However, a small amount of heat enters the system through the inlet doors, which are not double insulated, and also through the double layer insulation system. The effect of this heat gain on the ice condenser has been examined analytically. An analytical model of the sublimation process has been developed to provide an estimate of the expected sublimation rate as well as identify the significant parameters affecting the sublimation rate. The model developed a relationship identifying the fraction of total heat input which sublimes ice (the rest of the heat raises the temperature of the air, which transports the

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 50 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted vapor to the cold surface where it freezes).

The sublimation fraction depends on the difference in vapor pressure between warmest and coldest air temperatures within the ice condenser. The sublimation fraction decreases as the T decreases and also as the average ice condenser temperature decreases. For an average temperature of 15°F in the ice condenser compartment, the analytical model predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of heat gain to the ice storage compartment. The final heat gain calculations identified a heat gain into the ice storage compartment of 1 to 1.5 tons, most of which enters the compartment through the doors.

For the purposes of this report, it is assumed that the reference heat gain for the unit is 1 ton, and therefore, the calculated reference sublimation rate would be 1% of the ice weight per year.

Selected baskets are weighed as indicated in Technical Specifications to verify that the actual sublimation rate has not excessively depleted the ice inventory.

Sublimation - Operational The method used for determining the sublimation rate is from cycle to cycle ice basket weighing. The as-left basket weight is compared to the as-found basket weight in the next cycle for the same basket. Overall trends for the ice bed at large and on a row group basis are also used to validate the sublimation rate. Historical data for Watts Bar Unit 1 and for the Sequoyah Nuclear Plant have shown cycle to cycle sublimation rates of around three percent. The selection of six percent is based on engineering judgment to provide a large safety margin.

The surveillance acceptance criteria contain a sublimation allowance of six percent. The value does not include a margin for measurement uncertainty. Instrument uncertainty must be added to the surveillance requirement ice weight value to determine an acceptable basket weight. The allowance for instrument uncertainty is approximately +15 lbs.

The Ice Bed Temperature is maintained between 15°F and 20°F during plant operation.

The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating in this

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 51 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted temperature range. Procedures require actions to restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach 23°F.

43.

SCVB-RAI-3 FSAR Amendment 113, under heading Sublimation, page 6.7-64 states:

For an average temperature of 15oF in the ice condenser compartment, the analytical model predicts a sublimation rate of about 1% of the ice mass sublimed per year per ton (12,000 Btu/hr) of heat gain to the ice storage compartment.

The ice condenser compartment temperature of 15ºF specified in the above statement is not consistent with the ice bay air temperature of 27ºF specified in Table 1 of Reference 1, Enclosure 1.

(a) Correct the ice condenser compartment temperature in the above statement from 15ºF to 27oF, or provide justification for the difference.

(b) Recalculate the sublimation rate based on ice compartment air temperature of 27ºF, and provide its impact on the sublimation allowance.

TVA has clarified the referenced FSAR Section (6.7) to designate the current verbiage as historical and provided the empirical operational basis for how sublimation is calculated in response to SCVB-RAI-2.

(a) and (b)

The verbiage in question is part of the historical basis for ice condenser operation. The new operational basis consists of the following. The Ice Bed Temperature is maintained between 15°F and 20°F during plant operation.

The empirical sublimation rates described above are the results of operating in this temperature range. Procedure (ARI-138-144) requires actions to restore normal operating temperatures when ice bed temperatures reach 23°F.

44.

SCVB-RAI-4 Reference 1, Enclosure 2, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 2 Revised FSAR Section 6.2.1 Pages, page 6.2.1-8, under heading Structural Heat Removal, states a Tagami heat transfer coefficient for the lower containment compartment structures was limited to 72 Btu/hr-ft2.

, Attachment Westinghouse Summary The proposed long-term LOCA containment integrity analysis used the reviewed and approved LOTIC-1 code. Internal to the configured LOTIC-1 code is a limit placed on the stagnation heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2-°F.

This can be seen from the stagnation heat transfer coefficient presented in Equation 54 in WCAP-8355-P-A, Long Term Ice Condenser Containment Code LOTIC Code, April 1976. When the steam to air ratio is 1.4, Hstag is limited to 72 Btu/hr ft2-°F.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 52 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted Report, Section 4.4.3.3, Structural Heat Removal, page 42, mentions Tagami correlations for the heat transfer coefficient for the lower compartment structures were used in the proposed analysis, but does not provide its value. Confirm that the proposed analysis used heat transfer coefficient of 72 Btu/hr-ft2 consistent with the FSAR. In case it is changed, please revise the FSAR and justify if a less conservative (greater) value was used.

No changes were made to the code for this proposed analysis, so the structural heat transfer coefficient limit of 72 Btu/ht-ft2-°F described in the Structural Heat Removal subsection at the end of FSAR Section 6.2.1.3.3 continues to exist.

45.

SCVB-RAI-5 Reference 1, Enclosure 3, Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Unit 2 Revised Pages for TS and TS Bases 3.6.11, SR 3.6.11.2a weighs samples 144 ice baskets and verifies each basket contains 1415 lbs of ice. This surveillance allows individual baskets to weigh greater than 1415 lbs. FSAR Amendment 113, Section 6.7.6.1, page 6.7-22, specifies maximum total ice weight 3x106 lbs which results in an individual ice basket weight (3x106/1944) = 1543.2 lbs.

(a) Confirm that the maximum ice weight of 3x106 lbs is based on seismic qualification test results.

(b) Explain how, during surveillance, it would be verified that the individual ice basket weight and According to the Revision log for SDD N3-61-4001, Westinghouse performed a post-LOCA containment sump boron concentration analysis to address PER 03-006899-000.

The maximum ice weight used as an input to the Westinghouse Analysis was 3.0 x 106 lbs. DCN D51416-A revised the SDD to ensure the maximum total ice condenser weight does not exceed 3.0 x 106 lbs.

Westinghouse Letter WAT-D-10850, Section 1.1, concludes the evaluation performed by Westinghouse determined that the WBN ice basket maximum average loading limits and configuration requirements are acceptable based on seismic design allowables.

The configuration shown is 1/3 of 1944 baskets (648 baskets) at a maximum ice weight including basket of 1809 lbs, another 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including basket of 1909 lbs and the final 648 baskets at a maximum ice weight including basket of 2009 lbs for a total of 3,711,096 lbs of ice (including the weight of the baskets). The weight of the ice baskets as 250 lbs for a total empty ice basket weight of 250 x 1944 =

486,000 lbs. Therefore, WBN is seismically analyzed for 3,711,096 - 486,000 =

3,225,096 lbs of ice in the ice condenser. As mentioned above, the limiting maximum

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 53 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted the total ice weight in the ice condenser would not exceed the maximum limits.

value of ice is not based on the seismic qualification of the ice condenser but rather the post-LOCA sump boron concentration.

Surveillance requirements provide acceptance criteria not to exceed the 3,000,000 lb total weight based on the sample of ice basket weights as defined by Technical Specifications.

1-SI-61-2, 18 Month Ice Weighing, surveillance.

Additionally, individual ice baskets weights as described above are also controlled in the surveillance procedure as follows.

1)

The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 1, 2 & 3 is 1,809 lbs, but 1,794 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.

2)

The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 4, 5 & 6 is 1,909 lbs, but 1,894 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.

3)

The structural limit for the Ice Condenser per basket in rows 7, 8 & 9 is 2,009 lbs, but 1,994 lbs will be the adjusted weight to allow for M&TE inaccuracy when using the electronic load cells.

46.

SCVB-RAI-6 Reference 1, Enclosure 1, Attachment, Section 4.4.1.1 states:

In addition to the design basis, this analysis accounted for the effects of other plant changes of which Westinghouse is aware. These include increased..

Please describe all other changes that were incorporated in the mass and energy analysis beside the four changes described in Section 4.4.1.1.

In addition to the design basis, this analysis accounted for the effects of other plant changes of which Westinghouse is aware. These include increased valve stroke time (of

+13 seconds) to open the containment spray flow control valves (Reference 1), initial condition uncertainties on RCS temperature of +7°F, and 17x17 Robust Fuel Assembly-2 (RFA-2) fuel (which may incorporate tritium-producing burnable absorber rods (TPBAR)). Also, the evaluation that was provided in Reference 17 with the conclusion that a +/- 0.2 Hz variation in the diesel frequency would have a negligible impact on the LOCA mass and energy release analysis remains valid. It should be noted that these items were included for completeness even though they may not be currently implemented at WBN Unit 2.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 54 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted

47.

SCVB-RAI-7 Please confirm that Loss of train A concurrent with loss of offsite power (LOOP) during which CCS heat exchanger (HX) C carries the heat load of both the LOCA and shutdown unit is the most limiting condition for the CCS fluid temperature, containment analysis parameters (containment peak pressure and temperature) and the shutdown cooling analysis. For the most limiting case of heat loads, specify at what time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit the LOCA is assumed to occur in the LOCA Unit.

For the time after initiation of shutdown cooling in the Shutdown Unit, the LOCA is assumed to occur at 7-hours after initiation of the shutdown. The loss of Train A power is the limiting case for the containment analysis.

48.

TS - 2 Please provide a more complete explanation of why Conditions B of both proposed LCO 3.7.16 and proposed LCO 3.7.17 have no effective completion, i.e. Once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> ? Is this condition proposed to continue until the LCO expires i.e. 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> after entry into Mode 3 from Mode 1 or 2 ? The current basis statement for each LCO does not adequately explain why no restoration action is needed.

Date Posted: 08/25/15 Per LCO 3.0.2, if the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Actions is not required unless otherwise stated. Therefore, the Completion Times of LCO 3.7.16 and LCO 3.7.17 Condition B Required Actions continue until the LCO is met or is no longer Applicable.

The TS Bases will be revised to reflect the follow:



The purpose of the guidance contained in Condition B is to ensure clear direction is given to NOT enter Mode 5, if the additional ERCW and CCS alignments associated with TS 3.7.16 and TS 3.7.17 are not performed. This assumes that the CCS and ERCW System meet the requirements of TS 3.7.7 and TS 3.7.8, respectively, to support continued operation in Mode 4. In this case, with the plant in Mode 4, additional methods of decay heat removal are available and the potential for an uncontrolled heatup from Mode 5 should the postulated accident occur is avoided. Should additional inoperabilities impact compliance with TS 3.7.7, TS 3.7.8, or TS 3.4.6, the Actions associated with those TSs would prevail.

49.

TS - 4 The supplemental proposal changed the applicability statements for the new LCOs 3.7.16 and 3.7.17 without explanation in the document. Please further explain why the applicability statement This LCO is LCO 3.7.16 / LCO 3.7.17 Applicability Note b was originally proposed to preclude the requirement for additional CCS and ERCW pumps if complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5, since additional failures, such as a loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, does not have to be postulated while in a TS Action. However, as stated in the NRC scenario, if the postulated failure is the loss of Train A 6.9 kV shutdown boards, the GDC 5 event is still viable and the requirement for the additional CCS and ERCW pumps

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 55 of 64

Item No.

NRC Question/Request Date Posted TVA Response/Dated Posted not applicable for either of the following conditions:

b. When complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5 was essentially made new Condition A in each of the new TS AND Complying with Required Actions to be in Mode 5.

Date Posted: 08/03/15 is still required. Therefore, Applicability Note b was removed, as well as the adoption of TSTF-273.

If the requirement of either LCO 3.7.16 or LCO 3.7.17 is not met, maintaining the unit in Mode 4 with decay heat removal from the RCS loops is preferred. However, if TS Required Actions require entry into Mode 5, the remaining operable RHR loop is sufficient to cooldown the unit to and maintain it in Mode 5, even with a concurrent LOCA in the other unit. Therefore, the wording of Conditions A and B provide for these two scenarios.

50.

TS - 5 In a public meeting and audit discussions it has been presented that the additional ERCW pumps required by proposed LCO 3.7.17 are needed essentially for increased ERCW flow when the accident unit switches to recirculation mode to remove heat from the accident units Containment Spray heat exchangers. Please clearly articulate this point in a docketed submittal.

Date Posted: 08/03/15 The following information was provided by TVA in letter dated June 17, 2015, Enclosure 1, Section 4.1.2, Postulated GDC 5 Event, page E1-10:

The ERCW System design was based on requiring two ERCW pumps to handle the cooling loads to the UHS for shutting down both units during either normal operation or in the event of a LOCA and the shut down of the non-accident unit. It has been determined, for the specific set of scenarios in this evaluation, that three ERCW pumps will be required if a cool down of the non-accident unit using RHR occurs within the first 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> after a shutdown. The higher heat loads associated with continuing the cool down of the unit that has been shut down for less than 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />, combined with the heat removal requirements of the safety analysis for the DBA LOCA via RHR and containment spray, necessitates the use of three ERCW pumps during the initial 48 hour5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> time period. This additional cooling capacity is required prior to placing containment spray on recirculation mode.

Once the unit has been shut down for 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> or more, the total ERCW heat removal and thus, flow requirements, drop below the flowrate provided by two ERCW pumps.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 56 of 64

For integrated HX performance, See EPMJN010890 Table C7.7.69 and for U2 C7.7.89 At time 7-hours, provide two virtual HX models LOCA Unit Apportioned by Flow LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports Loss of Train A LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 3.35 1.63 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,801.98 2.47 1.86 61.23 61.95 4,524.89 5,000.00 2.22 2.48 0.86 1.22

-0.73

-1.15 54.80 54.80 85 103 110 125 103 136 125 166 25 22 22 29 0.75 0.47 0.92 2.21 1.48 2.95 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,252.52 1,390.11 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,592.56 190.42 381.27 UA F

m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)

M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R

S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)

T2 (deg. F)

T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)

HX CORRECTION FACTOR r

p F

UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 3.35 1.63

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 57 of 64

LOCA Unit Apportioned by Heat Load LOOP & Loss of Train A LOCA Recirc Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 2.64 1.63 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,801.98 2.47 1.86 61.23 61.84 3,483.59 5,000.00 1.71 2.48 0.62 1.22

-0.88

-1.15 54.80 54.80 85 111 117 133 111 145 133 174 32 22 22 29 0.75 0.47 0.92 1.70 1.48 2.27 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,463.36 1,388.62 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,592.56 194.67 381.16 UA F

m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)

M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R

S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)

T2 (deg. F)

T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)

HX CORRECTION FACTOR r

p F

UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 2.64 1.63

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 58 of 64

LOOP & Loss of Train A Shutdown Unit Supports LoTA LOCA Containment Analysis CCS HX C RHR HX RHR HX MISC 4.12 1.57 NOT IN N/A 1.00 0.90 SERVICE 5,000.00 3,025.23 2.46 1.48 61.23 61.92 5,679.60 5,000.00 2.79 2.48 1.22 1.47

-0.63

-1.25 89.27 89.27 85 105 117 141 105 156 141 216 32 36 36 60 0.60 0.54 0.90 2.78 1.48 3.70 2.48 1,172.18 1,386.96 1,089.98 1,389.78 1,013.34 2,159.37 807.61 2,159.37 186.19 368.36 UA F

m HOT, gpm m HOT, m#/hr DENSITY (of cold fluid)

M cold, gpm M cold, m#/hr R

S Q (MBtu/hr) t1 (deg. F) t2 (deg. F)

T2 (deg. F)

T1 (deg. F) delta t (deg. F) delta T (deg. F)

HX CORRECTION FACTOR r

p F

UA ADJUSTMENT m HOT, DESIGN M cold, DESIGN ho, DESIGN ho, ACTUAL hi, DESIGN hi, ACTUAL U, ACTUAL UA, ACTUAL 4.12 1.57

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 59 of 64

The respective UAs are 3.35 apportioned by flow and 2.64 apportioned by heat load. A UA of 3.17 was used in the analysis.

A sensitivity run for Unit 2 by Westinghouse showed that a change in UA from 3.17 to 2.00 using an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger resulted in an increase in containment pressure from 11.73 to 11.76 psig; therefore, the use of any of the three values (3.35, 3.17, or 2.64) will produce nearly identical containment pressures. Therefore, the containment design conditions are not exceeded for the two or three pump ERCW cases.

CCW HX UA 3.17 2.00 At 2718 sec Spray Recirc spray=

20,032 BTU/sec 20,047 BTU/sec RHR=

10,253 BTU/sec 9,262 BTU/sec At 3600 sec RHR Spray Start spray=

19,551 BTU/sec 19,641 BTU/sec RHR=

9,128 BTU/sec 8,347 BTU/sec Unit 1 W-COBRA/TRAC (Lotic 1) Results A similar analysis was run on Unit 1 with a UA of 2.00 and an ERCW flow of 3504 gpm to the virtual component cooling heat exchanger. There is no impact to the peak calculated pressure using the new approved W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies when the CCW HX UA is reduced to 2.0. The change in heat rates at the time of spray initiation is shown in the table below.

CCW HX UA 3.17 2.00 At 2718 sec Spray Recirc spray=

22,798 BTU/sec 22,798 BTU/sec RHR=

11,770 BTU/sec 10,612 BTU/sec There was no change in the spray heat removal rate and an approximately 10% reduction in the RHR heat removal rate. The RHR sprays are not credited in the analysis which uses W-COBRA/TRAC Mass & Energies because the calculated pressure will either not exceed 9.5 psig, or will only remain above 9.5 psig for a duration less than 3600 seconds.

Therefore, similarly on U1 the containment design is not challenged and the results are acceptable for two or three ERCW pump cases.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 60 of 64

Procedure Type Description 0-SI-82.01, Diesel Generator (DG) 1A-A 0-SI-82.02, Diesel Generator (DG) 1B-B 0-SI-82.03, Diesel Generator (DG) 2A-A 0-SI-82.04, Diesel Generator (DG) 2B-B System Operating Instructions Contains a check of switch position in the diesel standby alignment. This is performed after each surveillance run, the most frequent of which is monthly. In addition, this check is performed upon return to service of the DG following any maintenance activities.

1/2-GO-4, Normal Power Operation 1/2-GO-5, Unit Shutdown from 30%

1/2-GO-6, Unit Shutdown from HS to CSD General Operating Instructions Contains direction to commence alignments (GO-4 and GO-5).

Contains direction to ensure alignments are complete prior to entering Mode 4 in GO-6.

1/2-E-1, Loss of Reactor or Secondary Coolant Emergency Operating Instructions Contains direction to place in operation the equipment needed following a LOCA.

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 61 of 64

MCR ANNUNCIATOR - ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK HANDSWITCH IN BYPASS

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 62 of 64

ERCW PUMP INTERLOCK BYPASS SWITCH EXAMPLE

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 63 of 64



Updated June 17, 2015 letter, Enclosure 1, Table 3 Summary of Steady-State DG Loading with 3 ERCW Pumps (0 mins to end)

Pumps U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /

Loss of Train A U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /

Loss of Train A U1 LOCA / U2 Shutdown /

Loss of Train B U2 LOCA / U1 Shutdown /

Loss of Train B DG 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B 1A 2A 1B 2B ERCW 805 1610 1610 805 805 1610 1610 805 CCS 378 720 378 720 720***

378 720***

378 AFW (motor-driven) 400*

400*

400*

400*

Containment Spray 596 596 596 596 Centrifugal Charging 695 532 532 695 695 532 532 695 SI 460 460 460 460 RHR 440 370 370 440 440 370 370 440 Total / Large Motor Load (HP) 3774 3232 2890 4116 4116 2890 3232 3774 Pressurizer Heaters (kW) 500 500 500 500 DG Loading ****

0 - 20 minutes kW 4182 4261 4188 4283 4004 4174 3984 4165 kVA 4851 4797 4745 4930 4622 4684 4492 4781 20 min - 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> kW 4218 4015 3941 4313 4040 3927 3738 4201 kVA 4887 4514 4462 4960 4658 4401 4209 4818 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> - End kW 4067 4015 3941 4163 4148 3927 4015 4033 kVA 4688 4514 4462 4766 4769 4401 4513 4625

ENCLOSURE Responses to NRC Audit Review Questions for WBN Unit 1 ERCW and CCS License Amendment Request Page 64 of 64



Note: Refer to Table 1 for CCS and ERCW pump power alignments.

  • 0 Min - 2 Hrs 600 hp until SGs refilled; thereafter 400 hp (for both LBLOCA and SBLOCA).
    • 0 Min - 20 minutes 300 hp; then stopped
      • 378 hp until CCS Pump C-S is manually aligned after 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> for spent fuel pool cooling; then 720 hp (360hp each for CCSP 1A and C-S)
        • Values extracted from Appendix N-1, Pages 1 thru 4 of Diesel Loading Calculation, EDQ00099920080014 R31.